HP Compaq Elite 8200 USDT Specifications

Maintenance and Service Guide
8200
8200
8200
8200
6200
6200
Elite Series Convertible Minitower
Elite Series Microtower
Elite Series Small Form Factor
Elite Series Ultra-Slim Desktop
Pro Series Microtower
Pro Series Small Form Factor
© Copyright 2011 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P. The information
contained herein is subject to change
without notice.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
This document contains proprietary
information that is protected by copyright.
No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to
another language without the prior written
consent of Hewlett-Packard Company.
HP Compaq Business PC
Maintenance and Guide
8200 Elite Series Convertible Minitower
8200 Elite Series Microtower
8200 Elite Series Small Form Factor
8200 Elite Series Ultra-Slim Desktop
6200 Pro Series Microtower
6200 Pro Series Small Form Factor
First Edition (March 2011)
Document Part Number: 649701-001
About This Book
WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily
harm or loss of life.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage
to equipment or loss of information.
NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information.
iii
iv
About This Book
Table of contents
1 Installing and Customizing the Software ........................................................................... 1
Installing the Windows Operating System ................................................................................... 1
Downloading Microsoft Windows Updates ................................................................................. 2
Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers (Windows systems) ............................................................ 2
Customizing the Monitor Display (Windows systems) .................................................................... 2
Launching Windows XP from Windows 7 ................................................................................... 3
Accessing Disk Image (ISO) Files ............................................................................................... 3
2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility ............................................................................................. 4
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities ................................................................................................... 4
Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities ............................................................................ 5
Computer Setup—File ................................................................................................ 6
Computer Setup—Storage .......................................................................................... 7
Computer Setup—Security ........................................................................................ 10
Computer Setup—Power .......................................................................................... 14
Computer Setup—Advanced .................................................................................... 15
Recovering the Configuration Settings ....................................................................................... 17
3 Illustrated parts catalog .................................................................................................. 18
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts ....................................................................... 18
Computer system components ................................................................................... 18
Cables ................................................................................................................... 19
Misc parts .............................................................................................................. 20
Drives .................................................................................................................... 21
Misc boards ........................................................................................................... 22
Sequential part number listing ................................................................................... 22
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts ......................................................................................... 29
Computer major components .................................................................................... 29
Cables ................................................................................................................... 30
Misc parts .............................................................................................................. 31
Drives .................................................................................................................... 32
v
Misc boards ........................................................................................................... 33
Sequential part number listing ................................................................................... 34
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts ............................................................................ 40
Computer major components .................................................................................... 40
Cables ................................................................................................................... 41
Misc parts .............................................................................................................. 42
Drives .................................................................................................................... 43
Misc boards ........................................................................................................... 44
Sequential part number listing ................................................................................... 44
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts ............................................................................... 50
Computer major components .................................................................................... 50
Cables ................................................................................................................... 51
Misc parts .............................................................................................................. 52
Drives .................................................................................................................... 53
Misc boards ........................................................................................................... 54
Sequential part number listing ................................................................................... 55
4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation ................................ 61
Electrostatic Discharge Information ........................................................................................... 62
Generating Static .................................................................................................... 62
Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment ............................................................ 62
Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment ............................................................. 63
Grounding the Work Area ....................................................................................... 63
Recommended Materials and Equipment .................................................................... 64
Operating Guidelines ............................................................................................................. 64
Routine Care ......................................................................................................................... 65
General Cleaning Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 65
Cleaning the Computer Case .................................................................................... 65
Cleaning the Keyboard ............................................................................................ 66
Cleaning the Monitor ............................................................................................... 66
Cleaning the Mouse ................................................................................................ 66
Service Considerations ........................................................................................................... 66
Power Supply Fan ................................................................................................... 67
Tools and Software Requirements .............................................................................. 67
Screws ................................................................................................................... 67
Cables and Connectors ............................................................................................ 67
Hard Drives ............................................................................................................ 68
Lithium Coin Cell Battery .......................................................................................... 68
SATA Hard Drives .................................................................................................................. 69
SATA Hard Drive Cables ........................................................................................................ 69
SATA Data Cable ................................................................................................... 69
vi
SMART ATA Drives ................................................................................................................. 69
Cable Management ............................................................................................................... 69
Hard Drive Capacities ............................................................................................................ 70
5 Configurations and Serial Number .................................................................................. 71
Standard Configuration Features .............................................................................................. 71
Serial Number Location .......................................................................................................... 73
6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis ................. 76
Preparation for Disassembly .................................................................................................... 76
Computer Access Panel ........................................................................................................... 77
Front Bezel ............................................................................................................................ 78
Front Bezel Security ................................................................................................................ 79
Bezel Blanks .......................................................................................................................... 80
System Board Connections ...................................................................................................... 81
Memory ................................................................................................................................ 82
DIMMs .................................................................................................................. 82
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs .............................................................................................. 82
Populating DIMM Sockets ........................................................................................ 83
Installing DIMMs ..................................................................................................... 84
Expansion Card ..................................................................................................................... 86
Drives ................................................................................................................................... 90
Drive Positions ........................................................................................................ 91
Removing a Drive from a Drive Bay ........................................................................... 92
Installing Drives ....................................................................................................... 95
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ................................................ 97
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay ......................................... 99
Installing a 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay ................................. 103
Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive .............................. 104
Hood Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 109
Front I/O, USB Assembly ...................................................................................................... 110
Power Switch Assembly ........................................................................................................ 112
Speaker .............................................................................................................................. 113
Rear Chassis Fan ................................................................................................................. 114
Fan sink .............................................................................................................................. 115
Processor ............................................................................................................................ 117
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................... 120
System Board ...................................................................................................................... 121
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration ........................................................... 123
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration ........................................................... 125
vii
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis ................................. 128
Preparation for Disassembly .................................................................................................. 128
Computer Access Panel ......................................................................................................... 129
Front Bezel .......................................................................................................................... 130
Bezel Blanks ........................................................................................................................ 131
System Board Connections .................................................................................................... 132
Memory .............................................................................................................................. 134
DIMMs ................................................................................................................ 134
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs ............................................................................................ 134
Populating DIMM Sockets ...................................................................................... 135
Installing DIMMs ................................................................................................... 136
Expansion Cards .................................................................................................................. 138
Drive Positions ..................................................................................................................... 142
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 143
Removing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay .......................................... 145
Installing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ............................................ 147
Removing a Hard Drive from a Drive Bay ................................................................. 149
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay ...................................................... 149
Front Fan Assembly .............................................................................................................. 153
Front I/O Assembly .............................................................................................................. 155
Power Switch/LED Assembly ................................................................................................. 156
Heat sink ............................................................................................................................ 157
Processor ............................................................................................................................ 159
Speaker .............................................................................................................................. 162
Rear Chassis Fan ................................................................................................................. 163
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................... 165
System Board ...................................................................................................................... 167
8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis ...................... 169
Preparation for Disassembly .................................................................................................. 169
Access Panel ....................................................................................................................... 170
Front Bezel .......................................................................................................................... 171
Bezel Blanks ........................................................................................................................ 172
Memory .............................................................................................................................. 172
DIMMs ................................................................................................................ 172
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs ............................................................................................ 173
Populating DIMM Sockets ...................................................................................... 173
Installing DIMMs ................................................................................................... 174
Expansion Card ................................................................................................................... 176
System Board Connections .................................................................................................... 180
Drives ................................................................................................................................. 182
viii
Drive Positions ...................................................................................................... 183
Installing and Removing Drives ............................................................................... 184
Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay ........................................... 185
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay .............................................. 186
Removing a 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay ............................................. 187
Installing a 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay ................................................ 188
Removing and Replacing the Primary 3.5-inch Internal Hard Drive ............... 190
Fan duct .............................................................................................................................. 193
Front Fan Assembly .............................................................................................................. 194
Hood Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 196
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly ......................................................................................... 197
Speaker .............................................................................................................................. 199
Heat sink ............................................................................................................................ 200
Processor ............................................................................................................................ 202
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................... 205
System Board ...................................................................................................................... 207
Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower Orientation .................................................. 209
9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis .................. 210
Preparation for Disassembly .................................................................................................. 210
Access Panel ....................................................................................................................... 211
Front Bezel .......................................................................................................................... 212
Bezel Blank ......................................................................................................................... 213
System Board Connections .................................................................................................... 214
Memory .............................................................................................................................. 215
SODIMMs ............................................................................................................ 215
DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs ....................................................................................... 215
Populating SODIMM Sockets .................................................................................. 216
Installing SODIMMs ............................................................................................... 217
Front Fan ............................................................................................................................ 219
Optical Drive ....................................................................................................................... 220
Removing the Optical Drive .................................................................................... 220
Preparing the New Optical Drive ............................................................................ 221
Installing the New Optical Drive ............................................................................. 222
Hard Drive .......................................................................................................................... 223
Optical Drive Rail ................................................................................................................. 227
Card Reader ....................................................................................................................... 228
Speaker .............................................................................................................................. 230
Heat sink ............................................................................................................................ 231
Processor ............................................................................................................................ 233
TV Tuner or WLAN Module ................................................................................................... 236
ix
Hood Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 237
System Board ...................................................................................................................... 238
Rear Fan ............................................................................................................................. 240
Changing from Desktop to Tower Configuration ....................................................................... 242
Port Cover ........................................................................................................................... 243
Power Supply, External ......................................................................................................... 244
Appendix A Battery Replacement .................................................................................... 245
Appendix B Power Cord Set Requirements ....................................................................... 248
General Requirements .......................................................................................................... 248
Japanese Power Cord Requirements ....................................................................................... 248
Country-Specific Requirements ............................................................................................... 249
Appendix C POST Error Messages .................................................................................... 250
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages ............................................................................... 251
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes ............................................. 259
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics ............................................................ 263
Safety and Comfort .............................................................................................................. 263
Before You Call for Technical Support ..................................................................................... 263
Helpful Hints ........................................................................................................................ 264
Solving General Problems ..................................................................................................... 266
Solving Power Problems ........................................................................................................ 270
Solving Diskette Problems ...................................................................................................... 272
Solving Hard Drive Problems ................................................................................................. 275
Solving Media Card Reader Problems .................................................................................... 278
Solving Display Problems ...................................................................................................... 280
Solving Audio Problems ........................................................................................................ 284
Solving Printer Problems ........................................................................................................ 286
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems .................................................................................. 288
Solving Hardware Installation Problems .................................................................................. 290
Solving Network Problems .................................................................................................... 292
Solving Memory Problems ..................................................................................................... 296
Solving Processor Problems ................................................................................................... 297
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems ...................................................................................... 298
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems .......................................................................................... 300
Solving Front Panel Component Problems ................................................................................ 302
Solving Internet Access Problems ............................................................................................ 302
Solving Software Problems .................................................................................................... 305
x
Contacting Customer Support ................................................................................................ 306
Appendix E Password Security and Resetting CMOS ........................................................ 307
Resetting the Password Jumper ............................................................................................... 308
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS ......................................................................................... 309
Appendix F Drive Protection System (DPS) ....................................................................... 311
Accessing DPS Through Computer Setup ................................................................................. 312
Appendix G Computer Diagnostic Features ...................................................................... 313
Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics ........................................................................................ 313
Accessing HP Vision Diagnostics ............................................................................. 313
Survey Tab ........................................................................................................... 314
Test Tab ............................................................................................................... 315
Status Tab ............................................................................................................ 315
History Tab ........................................................................................................... 316
Errors Tab ............................................................................................................ 316
Help Tab .............................................................................................................. 317
Saving and Printing Information in HP Vision Diagnostics ........................................... 317
Downloading the Latest Version of HP Vision Diagnostics ........................................... 317
Protecting the Software ......................................................................................................... 318
Appendix H Backup and Recovery ................................................................................... 319
Windows 7 – Backup and Recovery ....................................................................................... 319
Backing up your information ................................................................................... 319
Performing a recovery ............................................................................................ 321
Using the Windows recovery tools ........................................................... 321
Using F11 ............................................................................................. 322
Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) .............. 322
Windows Vista – Backup and Recovery .................................................................................. 323
Backing up your information ................................................................................... 323
Performing a recovery ............................................................................................ 324
Using the Windows recovery tools ........................................................... 325
Using F11 ............................................................................................. 325
Using a Windows Vista operating system DVD (purchased separately) ......... 326
Appendix I Specifications ................................................................................................. 327
CMT Specifications .............................................................................................................. 327
MT Specifications ................................................................................................................. 328
SFF Specifications ................................................................................................................ 330
xi
USDT Specifications ............................................................................................................. 331
Index ............................................................................................................................... 332
xii
1
Installing and Customizing the
Software
If your computer was not shipped with a Microsoft operating system, some portions of this
documentation do not apply. Additional information is available in online help after you install the
operating system.
NOTE: If the computer was shipped with Windows Vista or Windows 7 loaded, you will be
prompted to register the computer with HP Total Care before installing the operating system. You will
see a brief movie followed by an online registration form. Fill out the form, click the Begin button, and
follow the instructions on the screen.
CAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to the computer until the operating
system is successfully installed. Doing so may cause errors and prevent the operating system from
installing properly.
NOTE: Be sure there is a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance at the back of the unit and above the monitor to
permit the required airflow.
Installing the Windows Operating System
The first time you turn on the computer, the operating system is installed automatically. This process
takes about 5 to 10 minutes, depending on which operating system is being installed. Carefully read
and follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
CAUTION: Once the automatic installation has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL
THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the installation process may damage the
software that runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.
NOTE: If the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive, the
installation process could take up to 60 minutes.
If your computer was not shipped with a Microsoft operating system, some portions of this
documentation do not apply. Additional information is available in online help after you install the
operating system.
Installing the Windows Operating System
1
Downloading Microsoft Windows Updates
1.
To set up your Internet connection, click Start > Internet Explorer and follow the instructions
on the screen.
2.
Once an Internet connection has been established, click the Start button.
3.
Select the All Programs menu.
4.
Click on the Windows Update link.
In Windows Vista and Windows 7, the Windows Update screen appears. Click view
available updates and make sure all critical updates are selected. Click the Install button and
follow the instructions on the screen.
In Windows XP, you will be directed to the Microsoft Windows Update Web site. If you see
one or more pop-up windows that ask you to install a program from http://www.microsoft.com,
click Yes to install the program. Follow the instructions on the Microsoft Web site to scan for
updates and install critical updates and service packs.
It is recommended that you install all of the critical updates and service packs.
5.
After the updates have been installed, Windows will prompt you to reboot the machine. Be sure to
save any files or documents that you may have open before rebooting. Then select Yes to reboot
the machine.
Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers (Windows
systems)
When installing optional hardware devices after the operating system installation is complete, you must
also install the drivers for each of the devices.
If prompted for the i386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use the Browse
button in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system to the
appropriate drivers.
Obtain the latest support software, including support software for the operating system from
http://www.hp.com/support. Select your country and language, select Download drivers and
software (and firmware), enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter.
Customizing the Monitor Display (Windows systems)
If you wish, you can select or change the monitor model, refresh rates, screen resolution, color settings,
font sizes, and power management settings. To do so, right-click on the Windows Desktop, then click
Personalize in Windows Vista and Windows 7 or Properties in Windows XP to change display
settings. For more information, refer to the online documentation provided with the graphics controller
utility or the documentation that came with your monitor.
2
Chapter 1 Installing and Customizing the Software
Launching Windows XP from Windows 7
Windows XP Mode for Windows 7 allows you to install and launch Windows XP applications from the
Windows 7 taskbar. This feature is available on some computer models only.
To set up from a pre-installed Windows 7 desktop, click Start > Windows Virtual PC > Virtual
Windows XP and follow the instructions on the screen.
Accessing Disk Image (ISO) Files
There are disk image files (ISO files) included on your PC that contain the installation software for
additional software. These CD image files are located in the folder C:\SWSetup\ISOs. Each .iso file
can be burned to CD media to create an installation CD. It is recommended that these disks be created
and the software installed in order to get the most from your PC. The software and image file names
are:
●
Corel WinDVD SD and BD – installation software for WinDVD – used to play DVD movies
●
HP Insight Diagnostics OR Vision Diagnostics – software to perform diagnostic activities on your
PC
Launching Windows XP from Windows 7
3
2
Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Use Computer Setup (F10) Utility to do the following:
4
●
Change factory default settings.
●
Set the system date and time.
●
Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor, graphics,
memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.
●
Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, optical drives, or USB flash media
devices.
●
Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests run
during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:
❑
always Quick Boot (default);
❑
periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or
❑
always Full Boot.
●
Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On Self-Test
(POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such as memory
count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the error is
displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages Enabled during
POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).
●
Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on or
restarted.
●
Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this computer.
●
Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during
power-on.
●
Establish a setup password that controls access to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the settings
described in this section.
●
Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or
embedded NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
●
Enable or disable removable media boot ability.
●
Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On SelfTest (POST).
●
Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on a USB device and
restoring it on one or more computers.
●
Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).
●
Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).
Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning the computer on or restarting the system. To access
the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:
1.
Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Microsoft Windows, click Start > Shut Down >
Restart.
2.
Press either Esc or F10 while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” message is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
Pressing Esc displays a menu that allows you to access different options available at startup.
NOTE: If you do not press Esc or F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and
again press Esc or F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
3.
If you pressed Esc, press F10 to enter Computer Setup.
4.
A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage, Security,
Power, and Advanced.
5.
Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and down)
keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup Utilities
menu, press Esc.
6.
To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
●
If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and
Exit.
●
To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings (some models), select Apply
Defaults and Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.
CAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the BIOS is saving the Computer Setup
(F10) changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off the computer only after
exiting the F10 Setup screen.
Table 2-1 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Heading
Table
File
Computer Setup—File on page 6
Storage
Computer Setup—Storage on page 7
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
5
Table 2-1 Computer Setup (F10) Utility (continued)
Security
Computer Setup—Security on page 10
Power
Computer Setup—Power on page 14
Advanced
Computer Setup—Advanced on page 15
Computer Setup—File
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 2-2 Computer Setup—File
Option
Description
System Information
Lists:
●
Product name
●
SKU number (some models)
●
Processor type/speed/stepping
●
Cache size (L1/L2/L3) (dual core processors have this listed twice)
●
Installed memory size/speed, number of channels (single or dual) (if applicable)
●
Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if applicable)
●
System BIOS (includes family name and version)
●
Chassis serial number
●
Asset tracking number
●
ME firmware version
●
ME Management mode
About
Displays copyright notice.
Set Time and Date
Allows you to set system time and date.
Flash System ROM
Allows you to update the system ROM with a BIOS image file located on removable media.
Replicated Setup
Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted USB flash media device.
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a USB flash media device.
Default Setup
Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
6
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 2-2 Computer Setup—File (continued)
Apply Defaults and
Exit
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any established passwords.
Ignore Changes
and Exit
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
Save Changes and
Exit
Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits Computer Setup.
Computer Setup—Storage
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage
Option
Description
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
7
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)
Device
Configuration
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are displayed. The following options
may be presented:
CD-ROM: Size, model, firmware version, serial number, connector color (not included for USB CDROM).
Hard Disk: Size, model, firmware version, serial number, connector color.
●
SMART (ATA disks only)
●
Translation mode (ATA disks only)
●
Connector color(ATA disks only)
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device. This enables the BIOS to access
disks partitioned and formatted on other systems and may be necessary for users of older
versions of UNIX (e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2). Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift, LBA Assisted,
User, and Off.
Available only when the drive translation mode is set to User, allows you to specify the
parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate disk
I/O requests (from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard drive can
accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may not exceed 256.
The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63.
CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not
be changed. If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that
was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be
inaccessible.
Diskette: Model and firmware version.
NOTE:
Displays for USB diskette drives.
Default Values (ATA disks only)
SATA Defaults
See Translation Mode above for details.
8
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)
Storage Options
eSATA Port (some models)
Allows you to set a SATA port as an eSATA port for use with an external drive. Default is enabled.
This setting affects only the port with the black connector, labeled as eSATA on the system board.
This port should have the eSATA back panel connector attached to use eSATA drives. For more
information, see the eSATA white paper at www.hp.com.
SATA Emulation
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are accessed by the operating system.
There are three supported options: IDE, RAID, and AHCI (default).
IDE - This is the most backwards-compatible setting of the three options. Operating systems usually
do not require additional driver support in IDE mode.
RAID - Allows DOS and boot access to RAID volumes. Use this mode with the RAID device driver
loaded in the operating system to take advantage of RAID features.
AHCI (default option) - Allows operating systems with AHCI device drivers loaded to take
advantage of more advanced features of the SATA controller.
NOTE: The RAID/AHCI device driver must be installed prior to attempting to boot from a RAID/
AHCI volume. If you attempt to boot from a RAID/AHCI volume without the required device driver
installed, the system will crash (blue screen). RAID volumes may become corrupted if they are
booted to after disabling RAID.
NOTE:
RAID is not available on USDT systems.
Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media. Default is enabled.
Max eSATA Speed (some models)
Allows you to choose 1.5 Gbps or 3.0 Gpbs as the maximum eSATA speed. By default, the speed
is limited to 1.5 Gbps for maximum reliability.
CAUTION: Consult your eSATA drive and cable manufacturer before enabling 3.0 Gpbs speed.
Some drive and cable combinations may not run reliably at 3.0 Gpbs.
NOTE:
eSATA is not available on USDT systems.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
9
Table 2-3 Computer Setup—Storage (continued)
DPS Self-Test
Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of performing the Drive Protection
System (DPS) self-tests.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the DPS selftests is attached to the system.
Boot Order
Allows you to:
●
Specify the order in which EFI boot sources (such as a internal hard drive, USB hard drive,
USB optical drive, or internal optical drive) are checked for a bootable operating system
image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for consideration
as a bootable operating system source.
EFI boot sources always have precedence over legacy boot sources.
●
Specify the order in which legacy boot sources (such as a network interface card, internal
hard drive, USB optical drive, or internal optical drive) are checked for a bootable operating
system image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for
consideration as a bootable operating system source.
●
Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in the order will have priority in
the boot sequence and will be recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).
NOTE: You can use F5 to disable individual boot items, as well as disable EFI boot and/or
legacy boot.
NOTE: MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non-MS-DOS operating system
has started.
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order, restart the
computer and press Esc (to access the boot menu) and then F9 (Boot Order), or only F9 (skipping
the boot menu) when the monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred bootable device and press Enter.
The computer then boots from the selected non-default device for this one time.
Computer Setup—Security
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security
Option
Description
Setup Password
Allows you to set and enable a setup (administrator) password.
NOTE: If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer Setup options, flash the
ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive that supports the DriveLock feature
is attached to the system.
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.
10
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
Power-On
Password
Allows you to set and enable a power-on password. The power-on password prompt appears after
a power cycle. If the user does not enter the correct power-on password, the unit will not boot.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive that supports the DriveLock feature
is attached to the system.
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.
Password Options
Allows you to enable/disable:
(This selection appears
only if a power-on
password or setup
password is set.)
●
Lock Legacy Resources (appears if a setup password is set). Default is enabled.
●
Setup Browse Mode (appears if a setup password is set) (allows viewing, but not changing,
the F10 Setup Options without entering setup password). Default is enabled.
●
Password prompt on F9, F11, & F12 (allows access to menus without entering setup
password). Default is enabled.
●
Network Server Mode (appears if a power-on password is set). Default is disabled.
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.
Smart Cover (some
models)
Allows you to:
●
Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
●
Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup Password.
NOTE: Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been removed.
Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor
detects that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on some models only. See the Desktop Management Guide for more
information.
Device Security
Allows you to set Device Available/Device Hidden (default is Device Available) for:
●
Embedded security device (some models)
●
System audio
●
Serial ports (some models)
●
Parallel port (some models)
●
Network controller
NOTE:
You must disable AMT before trying to hide the network controller.
●
SATA0
●
SATA1
●
SATA2 (some models)
●
SATA3 (some models)
●
SATA4 (some models)
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
11
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
USB Security
Allows you to set Enabled/Disabled (default is Enabled) for:
●
●
●
12
Front USB Ports
◦
USB Port 1
◦
USB Port 2
◦
USB Port 3
◦
USB Port 4
Rear USB Ports
◦
USB Port 1
◦
USB Port 2
◦
USB Port 3
◦
USB Port 4
◦
USB Port 5
◦
USB Port 6
Accessory USB Ports
◦
USB Port 1
◦
USB Port 2 (some models)
◦
USB Port 3 (some models)
◦
USB Port 4 (some models)
Slot Security
Allows you to disable any PCI or PCI Express slot. Default is enabled.
Network Boot
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network
server. (Feature available on NIC models only; the network controller must be either a PCI
expansion card or embedded on the system board.) Default is enabled.
System IDs
Allows you to set:
●
Asset tag (18-byte identifier), a property identification number assigned by the company to the
computer.
●
Ownership tag (80-byte identifier) displayed during POST.
●
Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number. The UUID can only be
updated if the current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in
the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)
●
Keyboard locale setting for System ID entry.
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Table 2-4 Computer Setup—Security (continued)
System Security
(some models: these
options are hardware
dependent)
Data Execution Prevention (enable/disable) - Helps prevent operating system security breaches.
Default is enabled.
Virtualization Technology (VTx)(some models) (enable/disable) - Controls the virtualization features
of the processor. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back on. Default
is disabled.
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O (VTd) (some models) (enable/disable) - Controls
virtualization DMA remapping features of the chipset. Changing this setting requires turning the
computer off and then back on. Default is disabled.
Intel TXT (LT) Support (some models) (enable/disable) - Controls the underlying processor and
chipset features needed to support a virtual appliance. Changing this setting requires turning the
computer off and then back on. Default is disabled. To enable this feature you must enable the
following features:
●
Embedded Security Device Support
●
Virtualization Technology
●
Virtualization Technology Directed I/O
Embedded Security Device Support (some models) (enable/disable) - Permits activation and
deactivation of the Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting requires turning the computer
off and then back on.
NOTE:
●
To configure the Embedded Security Device, a Setup password must be set.
Reset to Factory Settings (some models) (Do not reset/Reset) - Resetting to factory defaults will
erase all security keys. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back
on. Default is Do not reset.
CAUTION: The embedded security device is a critical component of many security schemes.
Erasing the security keys will prevent access to data protected by the Embedded Security
Device. Choosing Reset to Factory Settings may result in significant data loss.
OS management of Embedded Security Device (some models) (enable/disable) - This option allows
the user to limit operating system control of the Embedded Security Device. Changing this setting
requires turning the computer off and then back on. This option allows the user to limit OS control of
the Embedded Security Device. Default is enabled.
Reset of Embedded Security Device through OS (some models) (enable/disable) - This option allows
the user to limit the operating system ability to request a Reset to Factory Settings of the Embedded
Security Device. Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then back on. Default is
disabled.
NOTE:
DriveLock Security
To enable this option, a Setup password must be set.
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for hard drives. When this feature is
enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is
successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is
successfully provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
NOTE: This selection will only appear when at least one drive that supports the DriveLock feature
is attached to the system.
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
13
Computer Setup—Power
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 2-5 Computer Setup—Power
Option
Description
OS Power
Management
●
Runtime Power Management— Enable/Disable. Allows certain operating systems to reduce
processor voltage and frequency when the current software load does not require the full
capabilities of the processor. Default is enabled.
●
Idle Power Savings—Extended/Normal. Allows certain operating systems to decrease the
processors power consumption when the processor is idle. Default is extended.
●
Unique Sleep State Blink Rates—Enable/Disable. This feature is designed to provide a visual
indication of what sleep state the system is in. Each sleep state has a unique blink pattern.
Default is disabled.
◦
S0 (On) = Solid green LED.
◦
S3 (Stand By)= 3 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds
(green LED) — repeated cycles of 3 blinks and a pause.
◦
S4 (Hibernation)= 4 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) followed by a pause of 2 seconds
(green LED) — repeated cycles of 4 blinks and a pause.
◦
S5 (Soft Off) = LED is off.
NOTE: If this feature is disabled, S4 and S5 both have the LED off. S1 (no longer supported)
and S3 use 1 blink per second.
Hardware Power
Management
SATA Power Management – Enables or disables SATA bus and/or device power management.
Default is enabled.
S5 Maximum Power Savings—Turns off power to all nonessential hardware when system is off to
meet EUP Lot 6 requirement of less than 1 Watt power usage. Default is disabled.
Thermal
Fan idle mode—This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan speed.
NOTE: This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are still automatically
controlled.
14
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Computer Setup—Advanced
NOTE: Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware
configuration.
Table 2-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users)
Option
Heading
Power-On Options
Allows you to set:
●
POST mode (QuickBoot, Clear Memory, FullBoot, or FullBoot Every x Days).
◦
QuickBoot (default) = Do not clear memory or perform a memory test.
◦
FullBoot = Memory test (count) on cold boot. Clears memory on all boots.
◦
Clear Memory = No memory count on cold boot. Clears memory on all boots.
◦
FullBoot Every x Days = Memory count on 1st cold boot on or after the xth day. No more
memory counts until 1st cold boot on or after x days. Clears memory on all boots.
●
POST messages (enable/disable). Default is disabled.
●
Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Enable/Disable). Default is enabled.
●
Option ROM Prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display a
message before loading option ROMs. Default is enabled.
●
After Power Loss (off/on/previous state). Default is Power off. Setting this option to:
◦
Power off—causes the computer to remain powered off when power is restored.
◦
Power on—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is restored.
◦
Previous state—causes the computer to power on automatically as soon as power is
restored, if it was on when power was lost.
NOTE: If you turn off power to the computer using the switch on a power strip, you will not be
able to use the suspend/sleep feature or the Remote Management features.
●
POST Delay (in seconds). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified delay to the POST
process. This delay is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very
slowly, so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The POST delay
also gives you more time to select F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup. Default is None.
●
Remote Wakeup Boot Source (remote server/local hard drive). Default is Local hard drive.
●
System Recovery Boot Support (Enable/Disable). Provides the ability for the BIOS to redirect
the boot to the recovery partition on the user hard drive, if present. Some versions of the
recovery software honor the F11 key press even when this feature is disabled by the BIOS.
Default is disabled.
●
Bypass F1 Prompt on Configuration Changes (Enable/Disable). Allows you to set the computer
not to confirm when changes were made. Default is disabled.
BIOS Power-On
Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you specify.
Onboard Devices
Allows you to set resources for or disable Legacy devices.
Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
15
Table 2-6 Computer Setup—Advanced (for advanced users) (continued)
Bus Options
Device Options
16
On some models, allows you to enable or disable:
●
PCI SERR# Generation. Default is enabled.
●
PCI VGA Palette Snooping, which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration
space; only needed when more than one graphics controller is installed. Default is disabled.
Allows you to set:
●
Turbo Mode (enable/disable). Allows you to enable and disable the Intel Turbo Mode feature,
which allows one core of the system to run at a higher than standard frequency and power if
other cores are idle. Default is enabled.
●
Printer mode (Bi-Directional, EPP + ECP, Output Only). Default is EPP+ECP.
●
Num Lock State at Power-On (off/on). Default is off.
●
Integrated Video (enable/disable). Use this option to disable the integrated video controller
when another video controller is present in the system. Default is enabled.
●
Internal Speaker (some models) (does not affect external speakers). Default is enabled.
●
NIC Option ROM Download (PXE, iSCSI, disabled). The BIOS contains an embedded NIC
option ROM to allow the unit to boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used
to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC option ROM takes up memory space
below 1MB commonly referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space is
limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the downloading of this embedded NIC
option ROM thus giving more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need option
ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option-ROM-enabled. Default is PXE.
●
Multi-Processor (enable/disable). Use this option to disable multi-processor support under the
OS. Default is enabled.
●
Hyper-threading (enable/disable) (some models). Use this option to disable processor hyperthreading.
VGA Configuration
Displayed only if there is an add-in video card in the system. Allows you to specify which VGA
controller will be the “boot” or primary VGA controller.
AMT Configuration
Allows you to set:
●
AMT (enable/disable). Allows you to enable or disable functions of the embedded
Management Engine (ME) such as Active Management Technology (AMT). If set to disable, the
Management Engine is set to a temporarily disabled state and will not provide functions
beyond necessary system configuration. Default is enabled.
●
Unconfigure AMT/ME (enable/disable). Allows you to unconfigure any provisioned
management settings for AMT. The AMT settings are restored to factory defaults. This feature
should be used with caution as AMT will not be able to provide any set AMT management
functions once unconfigured. Default is disabled.
●
Watchdog Timer (enable/disable). Allows you to set amount of time for a operating system
and BIOS watchdog alert to be sent if the timers are not deactivated. BIOS watchdog is
deactivated by BIOS and would indicate that a halt occurred during execution if the alert is
sent to the management console. An operating system alert is deactivated by the operating
system image and would indicate that a hang occurred during its initialization. Default is
enabled.
Chapter 2 Computer Setup (F10) Utility
Recovering the Configuration Settings
This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command
with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed. (See Save to Removable Media
on page 6 in the Computer Setup—File table.)
NOTE: It is recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a USB flash
media device and save the device for possible future use.
To restore the configuration, insert the USB flash media device with the saved configuration and
perform the Restore from Removable Media command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility.
(See Restore from Removable Media on page 6 in the Computer Setup—File table.)
Recovering the Configuration Settings
17
3
Illustrated parts catalog
This chapter provides spare part information for all chassis.
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
Computer system components
18
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front bezel
646822-001
(2)
Access panel
646819-001
(3)
Power supply
320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
320W, standard
613765-001
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(4)
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
611835-001
Does not include TPM
649742-001
Memory modules (PC3-10600, 1333-MHz; not illustrated)
4-GB
585157-001
2-GB
635803-001
1-GB
635802-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638628-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Power switch/LED assembly
646820-001
(2)
SATA optical drive power cable
646832-001
Cables
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
19
Item
Description
Spare part number
(3)
Front I/O assembly
646821-001
(4)
SATA hard drive power cable
646831-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (unlabeled; not illustrated)
639958-001
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends (not illustrated)
639959-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (labeled; not illustrated)
646830-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Fan sink (includes replacement thermal material)
643907-001
(2)
Chassis fan, (92 mm x 92 mm)
643908-001
(3)
Speaker
645330-001
(4)
Solenoid lock
641498-001
(5)
Hood sensor
638816-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Hard drive conversion bracket (not illustrated)
397117-001
Misc parts
20
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001 (not illustrated)
583345-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
NOTE: For a list of supported countries and associated dash numbers, see Sequential
part number listing on page 22.
PS/2, basic
537745-xxx
USB, basic
537746-xx1
USB, mini
535873-xx1
Washable
613125-xx1
Smartcard
631411-xx4
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, BFR-PVC
590270-001
Washable
619580-001
Optical, jack black
444740-001
Laser, jack black
570580-001
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
750-GB, 7200-rpm
632938-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA3
639695-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA2
648963-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm
639694-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch
508312-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646809-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
607817-001
Optical drive
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
21
Description
Spare part number
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
Graphics cards
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641732-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
637997-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637591-001
Ports
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
Other boards/cards
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n card
538048-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
Sequential part number listing
22
Spare part
number
Description
397117-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
444740-001
Mouse, optical, jack black
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508312-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch hard drive
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
535873-001
USB mini keyboard for use in the United States
535873-121
USB mini keyboard for use in the French Canada
537745-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537745-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537745-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537745-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537745-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537745-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537745-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537745-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537745-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537745-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537745-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537745-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537745-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537745-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537745-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537745-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537745-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537745-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537745-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537745-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537745-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537745-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537745-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537745-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
23
24
Spare part
number
Description
537745-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537745-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537745-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537745-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537745-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537745-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537745-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537746-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537746-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537746-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537746-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537746-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537746-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537746-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537746-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537746-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537746-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537746-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537746-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537746-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537746-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537746-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537746-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537746-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537746-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537746-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537746-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537746-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537746-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537746-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537746-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537746-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537746-351
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Finland
537746-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537746-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537746-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537746-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537746-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537746-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n card
570580-001
Mouse, laser, jack black
636917-001
USB powered speakers
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581600-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
583345-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001
585157-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MH
590270-001
Mouse, USB, BFR-PVC
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
607817-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
611835-001
System board, TPM (includes replacement thermal material)
613125-001
Washable keyboard for use in the United States
613125-111
Washable keyboard for use in Switzerland
613125-121
Washable keyboard for use in French Canada
613125-131
Washable keyboard for use in Portugal
613125-141
Washable keyboard for use in Turkey
613125-171
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-201
Washable keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
613125-211
Washable keyboard for use in Hungary
613125-221
Washable keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
25
26
Spare part
number
Description
613125-231
Washable keyboard for use in Slovakia
613125-251
Washable keyboard for use in Russia
613125-261
Washable keyboard for use in Bulgaria
613125-271
Washable keyboard for use in Romania
613125-351
Washable keyboard for use in Finland
613125-AA1
Washable keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
613125-BB1
Washable keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
613125-DE1
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-L31
Washable keyboard for use with international English
613764-001
320W, 90% efficient
613765-001
320W, standard
616610-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
617030-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-001
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United States
631411-031
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
631411-041
Smartcard keyboard for use in Germany
631411-051
Smartcard keyboard for use in France
631411-061
Smartcard keyboard for use in Italy
631411-071
Smartcard keyboard for use in Spain
631411-081
Smartcard keyboard for use in Denmark
631411-091
Smartcard keyboard for use in Norway
631411-101
Smartcard keyboard for use in Sweden
631411-111
Smartcard keyboard for use in Switzerland
631411-121
Smartcard keyboard for use in French Canada
631411-131
Smartcard keyboard for use in Portugal
631411-141
Smartcard keyboard for use in Turkey
631411-151
Smartcard keyboard for use in Greece
631411-161
Smartcard keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
631411-171
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-181
Smartcard keyboard for use in Belgium
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
631411-201
Smartcard keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
631411-211
Smartcard keyboard for use in Hungary
631411-221
Smartcard keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
631411-231
Smartcard keyboard for use in Slovakia
631411-251
Smartcard keyboard for use in Russia
631411-281
Smartcard keyboard for use in Thailand
631411-291
Smartcard keyboard for use in Japan
631411-351
Smartcard keyboard for use in Finland
631411-371
Smartcard keyboard for use with International English
631411-AA1
Smartcard keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
631411-AB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Taiwan
631411-BB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
631411-DE1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-KD1
Smartcard keyboard for use in South Korea
631411-L31
Smartcard keyboard for use with international English
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632938-001
750-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
634824-001
320-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive, 2.5-inch
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635802-001
Memory module, 1-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
635803-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
636927-001
250-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636930-001
1-TB hard drive
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637997-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
638628-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
Convertible minitower (CMT) chassis spare parts
27
28
Spare part
number
Description
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638806-001
Hood sensor
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
639694-001
160-GB, 10000 RPM hard drive
639695-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA3 hard drive
639958-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (unlabeled)
639959-001
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641732-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641498-001
Solenoid lock
643907-001
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
643908-001
Chassis fan
645330-001
Speaker
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646819-001
Access panel
646820-001
Power switch/LED with holder
646821-001
Front I/O assembly
646822-001
Front bezel
646830-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (labeled)
646831-001
Hard drive power cable
646832-001
SATA optical drive power cable
648963-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA2 hard drive
649742-001
System board, no TPM (includes replacement thermal material)
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front bezel
646826-001
(2)
Access panel
646825-001
(3)
Power supply
(4)
320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
320W, standard
613765-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in 8200 Elite Series models:
●
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
611834-001
●
Does not include TPM
649741-001
For use in 6200 Pro Series models:
●
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
649515-001
●
Does not include TPM
615114-001
Memory modules (PC3-10600, 1333-MHz; not illustrated)
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
29
Item
Description
Spare part number
4-GB
585157-001
2-GB
635803-001
1-GB
635802-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638628-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front I/O assembly
646827-001
(2)
SATA optical drive power cable
646834-001
(3)
SATA hard drive power cable
646833-001
Cables
30
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(4)
Power switch/LED assembly
646828-001
(5)
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (unlabeled)
639958-001
(6)
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends
639959-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (labeled; not illustrated)
646830-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
645326-001
(2)
Fan with chassis with guard
585884-001
(3)
Hood sensor
638816-001
(4)
Speaker
645330-001
(5)
Solenoid lock
641498-001
(6)
Chassis fan, (92 mm x 92 mm)
636922-001
Fan duct assembly (not illustrated)
646824-001
Card reader, 22-in-1 (not illustrated)
636166-001
Misc parts
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
31
Item
Description
Spare part number
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Hard drive conversion bracket (not illustrated)
397117-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001 (not illustrated)
583345-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
NOTE: For a list of supported countries and associated dash numbers, see Sequential
part number listing on page 34.
PS/2, basic
537745-xxx
USB, basic
537746-xx1
Washable
613125-xx1
Smartcard
631411-xx1
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, BFR-PVC
590270-001
Washable
619580-001
Optical, jack black
444740-001
Laser, jack black
570580-001
Bezel blank (not illustrated)
5.25-inch
570838-001
3.5-inch
583653-001
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
32
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
750-GB, 7200-rpm
632938-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA3
639695-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA2
648963-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm
639694-001
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Description
Spare part number
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch
508312-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646809-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
607817-001
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
Graphics cards
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641732-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
637997-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637591-001
Ports
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
Other boards/cards
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n
538048-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
33
Sequential part number listing
34
Spare part
number
Description
397117-001
Hard drive conversion bracket
444740-001
Mouse, optical, jack black
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508312-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch hard drive
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537745-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537745-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537745-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537745-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537745-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537745-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537745-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537745-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537745-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537745-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537745-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537745-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537745-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537745-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537745-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537745-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537745-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537745-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537745-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537745-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537745-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537745-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537745-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537745-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537745-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537745-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537745-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537745-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537745-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537745-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537746-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537746-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537746-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537746-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537746-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537746-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537746-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537746-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537746-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537746-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537746-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537746-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537746-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537746-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537746-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537746-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537746-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537746-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537746-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537746-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537746-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
35
36
Spare part
number
Description
537746-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537746-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537746-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537746-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537746-351
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Finland
537746-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537746-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537746-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537746-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537746-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537746-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n card
570580-001
Mouse, laser, jack black
570838-001
Bezel blank, 5.25-inch
636917-001
USB powered speakers
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581600-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
583345-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001
583653-001
Bezel blank, 3.5-inch
585157-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MH
585884-001
Fan with chassis and guard
590270-001
Mouse, USB, BFR-PVC
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
607817-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
611834-001
System board, TPM (includes replacement thermal material)
613125-001
Washable keyboard for use in the United States
613125-111
Washable keyboard for use in Switzerland
613125-121
Washable keyboard for use in French Canada
613125-131
Washable keyboard for use in Portugal
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
613125-141
Washable keyboard for use in Turkey
613125-171
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-201
Washable keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
613125-211
Washable keyboard for use in Hungary
613125-221
Washable keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
613125-231
Washable keyboard for use in Slovakia
613125-251
Washable keyboard for use in Russia
613125-261
Washable keyboard for use in Bulgaria
613125-271
Washable keyboard for use in Romania
613125-351
Washable keyboard for use in Finland
613125-AA1
Washable keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
613125-BB1
Washable keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
613125-DE1
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-L31
Washable keyboard for use with international English
613764-001
Power supply, 320W, 90% efficient
613765-001
Power supply, 320W, standard
615114-001
System board, without TPM for use in 8200 Elite Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
616610-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
617030-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-001
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United States
631411-031
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
631411-041
Smartcard keyboard for use in Germany
631411-051
Smartcard keyboard for use in France
631411-061
Smartcard keyboard for use in Italy
631411-071
Smartcard keyboard for use in Spain
631411-081
Smartcard keyboard for use in Denmark
631411-091
Smartcard keyboard for use in Norway
631411-101
Smartcard keyboard for use in Sweden
631411-111
Smartcard keyboard for use in Switzerland
631411-121
Smartcard keyboard for use in French Canada
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
37
38
Spare part
number
Description
631411-131
Smartcard keyboard for use in Portugal
631411-141
Smartcard keyboard for use in Turkey
631411-151
Smartcard keyboard for use in Greece
631411-161
Smartcard keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
631411-171
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-181
Smartcard keyboard for use in Belgium
631411-201
Smartcard keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
631411-211
Smartcard keyboard for use in Hungary
631411-221
Smartcard keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
631411-231
Smartcard keyboard for use in Slovakia
631411-251
Smartcard keyboard for use in Russia
631411-281
Smartcard keyboard for use in Thailand
631411-291
Smartcard keyboard for use in Japan
631411-351
Smartcard keyboard for use in Finland
631411-371
Smartcard keyboard for use with International English
631411-AA1
Smartcard keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
631411-AB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Taiwan
631411-BB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
631411-DE1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-KD1
Smartcard keyboard for use in South Korea
631411-L31
Smartcard keyboard for use with international English
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632938-001
750-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
634824-001
320-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive, 2.5-inch
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635802-001
Memory module, 1-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
635803-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
636166-001
Card reader, 22-in-1
636922-001
Chassis fan
636927-001
250-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636930-001
1-TB hard drive
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637997-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
638628-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638806-001
Hood sensor
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
639694-001
160-GB, 10000 RPM hard drive
639695-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA3 hard drive
639958-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (unlabeled)
639959-001
SATA cable, 17.7 inch, 2 straight ends
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641732-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641498-001
Solenoid lock
645326-001
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
645330-001
Speaker
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646824-001
Fan duct assembly
646825-001
Access panel
646826-001
Front bezel
646827-001
Front I/O assembly
646828-001
Power switch/LED with holder
646830-001
SATA cable, 18 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (labeled)
646833-001
Hard drive power cable
Microtower (MT) chassis spare parts
39
Spare part
number
Description
646834-001
SATA optical drive power cable
648963-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA2 hard drive
649515-001
System board, includes TPM for use in 8200 Elite Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
649741-001
System board, without TPM for use in 8200 Elite Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Access panel
646816-001
AC adapter
(2)
(3)
40
180W
613766-001
135W
648964-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
611836-001
Does not include TPM
649743-001
Front bezel
646817-001
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
Memory modules (PC3-10600, 1333-MHz; not illustrated)
4-GB
646801-001
2-GB
646800-001
1-GB
646808-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 2600S (2.8-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638419-001
Intel Core i5 2500S (2.7-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638420-001
Intel Core i5 2400S (2.5-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
640953-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638628-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Optical drive cable/connector
605163-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Cables
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
41
Misc parts
Item
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
42
(1)
For the processor
587456-001
(2)
For the MXM graphics card
646807-001
For UMA graphics (not illustrated)
625256-001
(3)
Fan, rear
605155-001
(4)
Card reader
593235-001
(5)
Speaker
647447-001
(6)
Front I/O panel
587458-001
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(7)
Rear port cover
646818-001
(8)
Chassis fan, front
646813-001
Optical drive rail (green plastic piece on drive; not illustrated)
594219-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Hood sensor
638816-001
WLAN Antenna Hardware Kit
646811-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
NOTE: For a list of supported countries and associated dash numbers, see Sequential
part number listing on page 55.
PS/2, basic
537745-xxx
USB, basic
537746-xx1
Washable
613125-xx1
Smartcard
631411-xx1
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, BFR-PVC
590270-001
Washable
619580-001
Optical, jack black
444740-001
Laser, jack black
570580-001
Bezel blank (not illustrated)
593230-001
Stand
612496-001
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
634824-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm
639135-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
608746-001
160-GB, 7200-rpm
608745-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646809-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
607817-001
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
43
Description
Spare part number
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
646810-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe.
595115-001
DVD-ROM drive
608394-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
ATI Radeon HD5450M graphics card, 512 MB (without plate)
646812-001
WLAN 802.11a/b/g/n card
631954-001
HP TV Tuner Kit (includes hardware)
613990-001
Sequential part number listing
44
Spare part
number
Description
444740-001
Mouse, optical, jack black
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537745-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537745-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537745-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537745-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537745-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537745-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537745-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537745-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537745-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537745-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537745-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537745-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537745-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537745-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537745-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537745-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537745-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537745-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537745-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537745-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537745-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537745-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537745-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537745-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537745-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537745-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537745-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537745-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537745-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537745-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537746-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537746-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537746-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537746-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537746-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537746-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537746-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537746-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537746-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537746-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537746-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
45
46
Spare part
number
Description
537746-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537746-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537746-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537746-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537746-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537746-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537746-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537746-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537746-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537746-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537746-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537746-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537746-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537746-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537746-351
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Finland
537746-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537746-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537746-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537746-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537746-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537746-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
570580-001
Mouse, laser, jack black
636917-001
USB powered speakers
587456-001
Heat sink – processor (includes replacement thermal material)
587458-001
Front I/O panel
590270-001
Mouse, USB, BFR-PVC
593230-001
Bezel blank
593235-001
Card reader
594219-001
Optical drive rail and cable kit
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
595115-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe.
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
605155-001
Fan, rear
605163-001
Optical drive cable/connector
607817-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
608394-001
DVD-ROM drive
608745-001
160-GB, 7200-rpm hard drive
608746-001
250-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
611836-001
System board, TPM (includes replacement thermal material)
612496-001
Stand
613125-001
Washable keyboard for use in the United States
613125-111
Washable keyboard for use in Switzerland
613125-121
Washable keyboard for use in French Canada
613125-131
Washable keyboard for use in Portugal
613125-141
Washable keyboard for use in Turkey
613125-171
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-201
Washable keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
613125-211
Washable keyboard for use in Hungary
613125-221
Washable keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
613125-231
Washable keyboard for use in Slovakia
613125-251
Washable keyboard for use in Russia
613125-261
Washable keyboard for use in Bulgaria
613125-271
Washable keyboard for use in Romania
613125-351
Washable keyboard for use in Finland
613125-AA1
Washable keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
613125-BB1
Washable keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
613125-DE1
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-L31
Washable keyboard for use with international English
613766-001
AC adapter, 180W
613990-001
HP TV Tuner Kit (includes hardware)
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
47
48
Spare part
number
Description
619580-001
Mouse, washable
625256-001
Heat sink for use with UMA graphics
631411-001
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United States
631411-031
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
631411-041
Smartcard keyboard for use in Germany
631411-051
Smartcard keyboard for use in France
631411-061
Smartcard keyboard for use in Italy
631411-071
Smartcard keyboard for use in Spain
631411-081
Smartcard keyboard for use in Denmark
631411-091
Smartcard keyboard for use in Norway
631411-101
Smartcard keyboard for use in Sweden
631411-111
Smartcard keyboard for use in Switzerland
631411-121
Smartcard keyboard for use in French Canada
631411-131
Smartcard keyboard for use in Portugal
631411-141
Smartcard keyboard for use in Turkey
631411-151
Smartcard keyboard for use in Greece
631411-161
Smartcard keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
631411-171
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-181
Smartcard keyboard for use in Belgium
631411-201
Smartcard keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
631411-211
Smartcard keyboard for use in Hungary
631411-221
Smartcard keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
631411-231
Smartcard keyboard for use in Slovakia
631411-251
Smartcard keyboard for use in Russia
631411-281
Smartcard keyboard for use in Thailand
631411-291
Smartcard keyboard for use in Japan
631411-351
Smartcard keyboard for use in Finland
631411-371
Smartcard keyboard for use with International English
631411-AA1
Smartcard keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
631411-AB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Taiwan
631411-BB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
631411-DE1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
631411-KD1
Smartcard keyboard for use in South Korea
631411-L31
Smartcard keyboard for use with international English
631954-001
WLAN 802.11a/b/g/n card
634824-001
320-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive, 2.5-inch
638419-001
Intel Core i7 2600S (2.8-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638420-001
Intel Core i5 2500S (2.5-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638628-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638816-001
Hood sensor
639135-001
320-GB, 7200 RPM
640953-001
Intel Core i5 2400S (2.5-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
646800-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
646801-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MH
646807-001
Heat sink for use on the MXM graphics card
646808-001
Memory module, 1-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
646810-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
646811-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001
646812-001
ATI Radeon HD5450M graphics card, 512 MB (without plate)
646813-001
Fan, front
646816-001
Access panel
646817-001
Front bezel
646818-001
Rear port cover
647447-001
Speaker
648964-001
AC adapter, 135W
649743-001
System board, no TPM (includes replacement thermal material)
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis spare parts
49
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
Computer major components
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front bezel
646814-001
(2)
Power supply
(3)
90% efficient
613762-001
Standard
613763-001
System board (includes replacement thermal material)
For use in 8200 Pro Series models:
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
611834-001
Does not include TPM
649741-001
For use in 6200 Pro Series models:
(4)
●
Includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
649515-001
●
Does not include TPM
615114-001
Access panel
646815-001
Memory modules (PC3-10600, 1333-MHz; not illustrated)
4-GB
50
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
585157-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
2-GB
635803-001
1-GB
635802-001
Processors (include replacement thermal material; not illustrated)
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638628-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Front I/O and power switch assembly
636926-001
(2)
SATA cable, 19.5 inch, 2 straight ends
638813-001
(3)
SATA drive power cable
636923-001
Cables
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
51
Item
Description
Spare part number
SATA cable, 25.2 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end (not illustrated)
638814-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
463023-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
617450-001
DisplayPort cable
487562-001
Item
Description
Spare part number
(1)
Chassis fan
645327-001
(2)
Fan duct (not illustrated)
636921-001
(3)
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
645326-001
(4)
Speaker
636925-001
Misc parts
52
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item
Description
Spare part number
(5)
Solenoid lock
641498-001
(6)
Hood sensor
638816-001
Card reader, 22-in-1 (not illustrated)
636166-001
USB powered speakers (not illustrated)
636917-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included; not illustrated)
508987-001
Keyboard (not illustrated)
NOTE: For a list of supported countries and associated dash numbers, see Sequential
part number listing on page 44.
PS/2, basic
537745-xxx
USB, basic
537746-xx1
USB mini
611375x-xx1
Washable
613125-xx1
Smartcard
631411-xx4
Mouse (not illustrated)
PS2, optical, jack black
537748-001
USB, BFR-PVC
590270-001
Washable
619580-001
Optical, jack black
444740-001
Laser, jack black
570580-001
Drives
Description
Spare part number
Hard drive
1-TB, 7200-rpm
636930-001
750-GB, 7200-rpm
632938-001
500-GB, 7200-rpm
636929-001
320-GB, 7200-rpm, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA3
639695-001
300-GB, 10000-rpm, SATA2
648963-001
250-GB, 7200-rpm
636927-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm
639694-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch
508312-001
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
53
Description
Spare part number
160-GB Solid-state drive
646809-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
607817-001
Optical drive
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
594220-001
Misc boards
Description
Spare part number
Graphics cards
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637591-001
Ports
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
Other boards/cards
54
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n
538048-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001
583345-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Sequential part number listing
Spare part
number
Description
444740-001
Mouse, optical, jack black
463023-001
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
484156-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
487562-001
DisplayPort cable
508312-001
160-GB, 10000-rpm, 2.5-inch hard drive
508987-001
Clamp lock, includes universal cable (plate not included)
537745-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537745-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537745-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537745-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537745-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537745-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537745-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537745-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537745-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537745-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537745-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537745-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537745-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537745-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537745-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537745-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537745-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537745-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537745-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537745-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537745-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537745-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
537745-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
55
56
Spare part
number
Description
537745-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537745-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537745-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537745-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537745-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537745-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537745-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537745-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537745-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537746-001
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United States
537746-031
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
537746-041
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Germany
537746-051
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in France
537746-061
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Italy
537746-071
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Spain
537746-081
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Denmark
537746-091
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Norway
537746-101
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Sweden
537746-111
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Switzerland
537746-121
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in French Canada
537746-131
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Portugal
537746-141
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Turkey
537746-151
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Greece
537746-161
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
537746-171
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-181
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Belgium
537746-201
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
537746-211
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Hungary
537746-221
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
537746-231
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Slovakia
537746-251
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Russia
537746-261
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Bulgaria
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
537746-271
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Romania
537746-281
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Thailand
537746-291
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Japan
537746-351
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Finland
537746-371
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with International English
537746-AA1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
537746-AB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Taiwan
537746-BB1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
537746-DE1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
537746-KD1
PS/2 basic keyboard for use in South Korea
537746-L31
PS/2 basic keyboard for use with international English
537748-001
Mouse, PS2, optical, jack black
538048-001
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n card
570580-001
Mouse, laser, jack black
636917-001
USB powered speakers
581599-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581600-001
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
583345-001
Antenna for use with 538048-001
585157-001
Memory module, 4-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MH
590270-001
Mouse, USB, BFR-PVC
594220-001
Grommet, hard drive isolation, blue
603250-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
607817-001
80-GB Solid-state drive
611375-001
USB mini keyboard for use in the United States
611375-121
USB mini keyboard for use in the French Canada
611834-001
System board, includes TPM for use in 8200 Elite Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
613125-001
Washable keyboard for use in the United States
613125-111
Washable keyboard for use in Switzerland
613125-121
Washable keyboard for use in French Canada
613125-131
Washable keyboard for use in Portugal
613125-141
Washable keyboard for use in Turkey
613125-171
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
57
58
Spare part
number
Description
613125-201
Washable keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
613125-211
Washable keyboard for use in Hungary
613125-221
Washable keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
613125-231
Washable keyboard for use in Slovakia
613125-251
Washable keyboard for use in Russia
613125-261
Washable keyboard for use in Bulgaria
613125-271
Washable keyboard for use in Romania
613125-351
Washable keyboard for use in Finland
613125-AA1
Washable keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
613125-BB1
Washable keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
613125-DE1
Washable keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
613125-L31
Washable keyboard for use with international English
613762-001
Power supply, 90% efficient
613763-001
Power supply, standard
615114-001
System board, without TPM for use in 6200 Pro Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
616610-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
617030-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617450-001
Adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
619580-001
Mouse, washable
631411-001
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United States
631411-031
Smartcard keyboard for use in the United Kingdom
631411-041
Smartcard keyboard for use in Germany
631411-051
Smartcard keyboard for use in France
631411-061
Smartcard keyboard for use in Italy
631411-071
Smartcard keyboard for use in Spain
631411-081
Smartcard keyboard for use in Denmark
631411-091
Smartcard keyboard for use in Norway
631411-101
Smartcard keyboard for use in Sweden
631411-111
Smartcard keyboard for use in Switzerland
631411-121
Smartcard keyboard for use in French Canada
631411-131
Smartcard keyboard for use in Portugal
631411-141
Smartcard keyboard for use in Turkey
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Spare part
number
Description
631411-151
Smartcard keyboard for use in Greece
631411-161
Smartcard keyboard for use in Latin America (Spanish)
631411-171
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-181
Smartcard keyboard for use in Belgium
631411-201
Smartcard keyboard for use in Brazil (Portuguese)
631411-211
Smartcard keyboard for use in Hungary
631411-221
Smartcard keyboard for use in the Czech Republic
631411-231
Smartcard keyboard for use in Slovakia
631411-251
Smartcard keyboard for use in Russia
631411-281
Smartcard keyboard for use in Thailand
631411-291
Smartcard keyboard for use in Japan
631411-351
Smartcard keyboard for use in Finland
631411-371
Smartcard keyboard for use with International English
631411-AA1
Smartcard keyboard for use in the People's Republic of China
631411-AB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Taiwan
631411-BB1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Israel (Hebrew)
631411-DE1
Smartcard keyboard for use in Saudi Arabia
631411-KD1
Smartcard keyboard for use in South Korea
631411-L31
Smartcard keyboard for use with international English
632486-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632938-001
750-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
634824-001
320-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive, 2.5-inch
635523-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635802-001
Memory module, 1-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
635803-001
Memory module, 2-GB, PC3 10600, 1333-MHz
636166-001
Card reader, 22-in-1
645327-001
Chassis fan
636927-001
250-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636929-001
500-GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
636930-001
1-TB hard drive
637213-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637591-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
Small Form Factor (SFF) chassis spare parts
59
60
Spare part
number
Description
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
638628-001
Intel Core i3 2100 (3.1-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638629-001
Intel Core i3 2120 (3.3-GHz, 3-MB L3 cache)
638630-001
Intel Core i5 2400 (3.1-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638631-001
Intel Core i5 2500 (3.3-GHz, 6-MB L3 cache)
638632-001
Intel Core i7 2600 (3.4-GHz, 8-MB L3 cache)
638806-001
Hood sensor
638815-001
Serial port PCI card
638816-001
Hood sensor
638817-001
Printer port, PCI card
639694-001
160-GB, 10000 RPM hard drive
639695-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA3 hard drive
638813-001
SATA cable, 19.5 inch, 2 straight ends
638814-001
SATA cable, 25.2 inch, 1 straight end, 1 angled end
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641498-001
Solenoid lock
645326-001
Heat sink (includes replacement thermal material)
636925-001
Speaker
645558-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
646809-001
160-GB Solid-state drive
636921-001
Fan duct
646815-001
Access panel
646814-001
Front bezel
636926-001
Front I/O assembly
636923-001
SATA drive power cable
648963-001
300-GB, 10000 RPM, SATA2 hard drive
649515-001
System board, includes TPM for use in 6200 Pro Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
649741-001
System board, without TPM for use in 8200 Elite Series models (includes replacement thermal material)
Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
4
Routine Care, SATA Drive
Guidelines, and Disassembly
Preparation
This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures and
precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the
computer to prevent system board or component damage.
61
Electrostatic Discharge Information
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensitive
devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An electronic
device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be affected at all and can work
perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function normally for a while, but it has been
degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the discharge
contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
Generating Static
The following table shows that:
●
Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
●
Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Relative Humidity
Event
55%
40%
10%
Walking across carpet
7,500 V
15,000 V
35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor
3,000 V
5,000 V
12,000 V
Motions of bench worker
400 V
800 V
6,000 V
Removing DIPs from plastic tube
400 V
700 V
2,000 V
Removing DIPs from vinyl tray
2,000 V
4,000 V
11,500 V
Removing DIPs from Styrofoam
3,500 V
5,000 V
14,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB
7,000 V
20,000 V
26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
5,000 V
11,000 V
21,000 V
These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.
NOTE: 700 volts can degrade a product.
Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the degree
of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent damage to
electric components and accessories.
62
●
To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or boxes.
●
Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
Chapter 4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
●
Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
●
Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
●
Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.
●
Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
●
Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or conductive
foam.
Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
●
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance in the ground
cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The ground cord
must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or
workstation.
●
Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are
compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use
them on both feet with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance between the operator and
ground.
Static Shielding Protection Levels
Method
Voltage
Antistatic plastic
1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic
7,500
Metallized laminate
15,000
Grounding the Work Area
To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:
●
Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap connected
to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
●
Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
●
Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB laminate.
Handle them only at static-free work areas.
●
Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
●
Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces.
●
Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
●
Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.
Electrostatic Discharge Information
63
Recommended Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
●
Antistatic tape
●
Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
●
Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
●
Conductive foam
●
Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
●
Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
●
Field service kits
●
Static awareness labels
●
Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
●
Material handling packages
●
Conductive plastic bags
●
Conductive plastic tubes
●
Conductive tote boxes
●
Opaque shielding bags
●
Transparent metallized shielding bags
●
Transparent shielding tubes
Operating Guidelines
To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:
64
●
Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and cold.
●
Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all vented
sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.
●
Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place the
keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as this also
restricts airflow.
●
Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other foreign
matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer before cleaning
the air vents.
●
Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.
Chapter 4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
●
Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they are
subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.
●
If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation must
be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still apply.
●
Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.
●
Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.
●
Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software, including
sleep states.
Routine Care
General Cleaning Safety Precautions
1.
Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.
2.
Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth and
then use the cloth on the component.
3.
Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
4.
Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.
5.
Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.
6.
Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.
Cleaning the Computer Case
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 65 before cleaning the
computer.
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:
●
To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.
●
For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it with
a cloth or swab dampened with clear water.
●
For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.
●
After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.
●
Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the vents
and limit the airflow.
Routine Care
65
Cleaning the Keyboard
Follow all safety precautions in General Cleaning Safety Precautions on page 65 before cleaning the
keyboard.
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Cleaning the
Computer Case on page 65.
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in General Cleaning Safety Precautions
on page 65 before following these procedures:
CAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from
under the keys.
●
Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.
●
Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be used
as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.
●
If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This tool
is available through many electronic supply outlets.
CAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these
keys are improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.
●
Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and squeezed
out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use tweezers to
remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before reassembly.
Cleaning the Monitor
●
Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette designed for
cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the liquid may seep into
the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable liquids on the monitor.
●
To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 65.
Cleaning the Mouse
Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.
●
Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull out
any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before reassembly.
●
To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Cleaning the Computer Case on page 65.
Service Considerations
Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly and
assembly of the computer.
66
Chapter 4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
Power Supply Fan
The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.
CAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is
off when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.
You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent
system board or component damage.
Tools and Software Requirements
To service the computer, you need the following:
●
Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)
●
Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)
●
Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)
●
Phillips #2 screwdriver
●
Diagnostics software
●
HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or HP tamperresistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)
Screws
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric threads
and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly process, it can
damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during disassembly be kept with the
part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.
CAUTION: Metric screws have a black finish. U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard
drives only.
CAUTION: As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the
work area to prevent damage.
Cables and Connectors
Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with care
to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during insertion or
removal from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In all cases, avoid
bending or twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be
caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced.
CAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location
during the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.
Service Considerations
67
Hard Drives
Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration. This
applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.
●
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
●
Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.
●
Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
●
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard drive
while the computer is on or in standby mode.
●
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a
drive, avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage,
refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62
●
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
●
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic
fields such as monitors or speakers.
Lithium Coin Cell Battery
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a minimum
lifetime of about three years.
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this guide
for instructions on the replacement procedures.
WARNING! This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the
battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose in
water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the
battery.
NOTE: Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the
general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the
public collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
68
Chapter 4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
SATA Hard Drives
Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics
Number of pins/conductors in data cable
7/7
Number of pins in power cable
15
Maximum data cable length
39.37 in (100 cm)
Data interface voltage differential
400-700 mV
Drive voltages
3.3 V, 5 V, 12 V
Jumpers for configuring drive
N/A
Data transfer rate
3.0 Gb/s
SATA Hard Drive Cables
SATA Data Cable
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the SATA
1.5 Gb/s drives.
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and never
bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive.
SMART ATA Drives
The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP Personal
Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network administrator of an
impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault prediction and failure
indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count, and calibration retry count. If
the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault alert.
Cable Management
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
●
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heat sink.
●
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like these
are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
SATA Hard Drives
69
●
Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped when
the parts are moved.
●
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
●
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
●
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
●
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
●
Never crease a SATA data cable.
●
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push cables
down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
Hard Drive Capacities
The combination of the file system and the operating system used in the computer determines the
maximum usable size of a drive partition. A drive partition is the largest segment of a drive that may be
properly accessed by the operating system. A single hard drive may therefore be subdivided into a
number of unique drive partitions in order to make use of all of its space.
Because of the differences in the way that drive sizes are calculated, the size reported by the operating
system may differ from that marked on the hard drive or listed in the computer specification. Drive size
calculations by drive manufacturers are bytes to the base 10 while calculations by Microsoft are bytes
to the base 2.
Drive/Partition Capacity Limits
Maximum Size
70
File System
Controller Type
Operating System
Partition
Drive
FAT 32
ATA
Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7
32 GB
2 TB
NTFS
ATA
Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7
2 TB
2 TB
Chapter 4 Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation
5
Configurations and Serial Number
Standard Configuration Features
Features may vary depending on the model. For a complete listing of the hardware and software
installed in the computer, run the diagnostic utility (included on some computer models only).
Figure 5-1 Convertible Minitower Configuration
NOTE: The HP Compaq Convertible Minitower computer can be easily converted to a desktop. For
more information, see Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration on page 123 in this
guide.
Standard Configuration Features
71
Figure 5-2 Microtower Configuration
Figure 5-3 Small Form Factor Configuration
NOTE: The Small Form Factor computer can also be used in a tower orientation. For more
information, see Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower Orientation on page 209 in this
guide.
72
Chapter 5 Configurations and Serial Number
Figure 5-4 Ultra-Slim Desktop Configuration
Serial Number Location
Each computer has a unique serial number and a product ID number that are located on the top cover
of the computer. Keep these numbers available for use when contacting customer service for assistance.
Figure 5-5 Convertible Minitower Serial Number and Product ID Location
Serial Number Location
73
Figure 5-6 Microtower Serial Number and Product ID Location
Figure 5-7 Small Form Factor Serial Number and Product ID Location
74
Chapter 5 Configurations and Serial Number
Figure 5-8 Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Serial Number and Product ID Location
Serial Number Location
75
6
Removal and Replacement
Procedures – Convertible Minitower
(CMT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify
that all components operate properly.
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 61 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8.
As applicable, lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
76
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
Computer Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646819-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76)
2.
Lay the computer down on its large base for greater stability.
3.
Lift up on the access panel handle (1) then lift the access panel off the computer (2).
Figure 6-1 Removing the Computer Access Panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
Computer Access Panel
77
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
646822-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 6-2 Removing the Front Bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
78
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Front Bezel Security
The front bezel can be locked in place by installing a security screw provided by HP. To install the
security screw:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Remove the security screw from the inside of the front bezel.
Figure 6-3 Retrieving the Front Bezel Security Screw
5.
Replace the front bezel.
6.
Install the screw through the interior of the front of the chassis into the front bezel. The screw hole
is located on the left edge of the chassis next to the top hard drive bay.
Figure 6-4 Installing the Front Bezel Security Screw
Front Bezel Security
79
7.
Replace the access panel.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Bezel Blanks
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Gently pull the subpanel, with the bezel blanks secured in it, away from the front bezel, then
remove the desired bezel blank.
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
Figure 6-5 Removing Bezel Blanks from the Subpanel (Desktop Shown)
NOTE: When replacing the subpanel, ensure that the aligning pins and any remaining bezel blanks
are in their proper orientation. The logo on the subpanel should be located at the bottom of the
subpanel when properly oriented.
80
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors.
Figure 6-6 System Board Connections
Table 6-1 System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
PCI
PCI3
white
Expansion Card
2
PCI
PCI2
white
Expansion Card
3
PCI
PCI1
white
Expansion Card
4
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
5
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
6
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
7
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
8
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
9
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
10
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
11
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
12
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
13
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
14
Power
SATA PWR1
black
SATA Optical Drives
15
Power
SATA PWR0
black
SATA Hard Drives
System Board Connections
81
Table 6-1 System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
16
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
17
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
18
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
3rd Hard Drive, or 1st Optical Drive
if no 3rd Hard Drive
19
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
20
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive
21
SATA 2.0
SATA3
white
2nd Optical Drive, or 1st Optical
Drive if a 3rd Hard Drive exists
22
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive if a 3rd Hard Drive
exists
23
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
Memory
Description
Spare part number
4-GB, PC3-10600
585157-001
2-GB, PC3-10600
635803-001
1-GB, PC3-10600
635802-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a highperforming dual channel mode.
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
82
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-8500 DDR3-1066 MHz-compliant or PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 MHzcompliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 7 DDR3 1066 MHz (7-7-7 timing) and CAS latency 9 DDR3 1333 MHz
(9-9-9 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one channel
only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity of
the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. The
technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual
channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels should
be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels. If one
channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to Channel
A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB DIMMs,
Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel B should
Memory
83
be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as dual
channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
84
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
3.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 6-7 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with
the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as equally
as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets on page 83
for more information.
4.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install any additional modules.
6.
Replace the computer access panel.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Memory
85
Expansion Card
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641732-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
637997-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
The computer has three standard full-height PCI expansion slots, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot, one
PCI Express x16 expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to a x4
slot.
NOTE: You can install a PCI Express x1, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slots.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express x16
slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot.
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
86
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding expansion
slot on the back of the computer chassis.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
4.
Press straight down on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis (1) and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up (2).
Figure 6-8 Opening the Expansion Slot Retainer
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Lift the expansion slot cover from the expansion slot.
Figure 6-9 Removing an Expansion Slot Cover
Expansion Card
87
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the card
straight up to remove it. Be sure not to scrape the card against other components.
Figure 6-10 Removing a Standard PCI Expansion Card
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the card straight up to remove it. Be sure not to
scrape the card against other components.
Figure 6-11 Removing a PCI Express x16 Expansion Card
88
6.
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
8.
To install a new expansion card, slide the bracket on the end of the card down into the slot on the
back of the chassis and press the card down firmly into the socket on the system board.
Figure 6-12 Installing an Expansion Card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector
seats properly in the expansion card slot.
9.
Close the expansion card retention latch, making sure that it snaps firmly into place.
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
14. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
Expansion Card
89
Drives
90
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
750 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
632938-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
320 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA3 hard drive
639695-001
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA2 hard drive
648963-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive
639694-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
508312-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
646809-001
80 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
607817-001
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Drive Positions
Figure 6-13 Drive Positions (Minitower Configuration Shown)
Table 6-2 Drive Positions
1
Three 5.25-inch drive bays for optional drives (optical drives and media card reader shown)
2
Three 3.5-inch internal hard drive bays
NOTE:
The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive configuration shown above.
The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom bay supports
a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches) in depth. Do not try to
force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This could cause damage to the
drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay
may result in damage to the drive.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Drives
91
Removing a Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Disconnect the drive cables, as indicated in the following illustrations:
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
●
If you are removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the
back of the drive.
●
If you are removing a media card reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board.
Figure 6-14 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
●
92
If you are removing a hard drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back
of the drive.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
5.
Remove the drive from the drive bay as follows:
●
To remove a 5.25-inch drive in the desktop configuration, press down on the yellow drivelock
mechanism (1) and slide the drive from the drive bay (2).
CAUTION: When the yellow drivelock is pressed, all the 5.25-inch drives are released so
do not tilt the unit and allow the drives to fall out.
Figure 6-15 Removing a 5.25-inch Drive in the Desktop Configuration (Optical Drive
shown)
●
To remove a 5.25-inch drive in the minitower configuration, pull up on the green drivelock
mechanism (1) for that specific drive and slide the drive from the drive bay (2).
Figure 6-16 Removing a 5.25-inch Drive in the Minitower Configuration (Optical Drive
shown)
Drives
93
●
To remove a hard drive from one of the two lower internal hard drive bays, pull up on the
green hard drive drivelock mechanism (1) for that drive and slide the drive from the drive
bay (2).
Figure 6-17 Removing a Hard Drive from the Lower Two Bays
●
To remove a hard drive from the upper internal hard drive bay, remove the screw on the side
of the bay that secures the drive in place (1), then slide the drive out of the bay (2).
Figure 6-18 Removing a Hard Drive from the Upper Bay
94
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing Drives
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue SATA connector on
the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it to the light
blue SATA1 connector.
●
Connect the first SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled
SATA2. If you are adding a second optical drive, connect it to the white SATA3 connector.
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA optical drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the middle 5.25-inch bay and the second connector routed
to the top 5.25-inch bay.
●
The power cable for the SATA hard drives is a three-headed cable this is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the bottom 3.5-inch bay, the second connector routed to
the middle 3.5-inch bay, and the third connector routed to the top 3.5-inch bay.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in
place. HP has provided extra guide screws installed on the chassis. The hard drive uses 6-32
isolation mounting guide screws in the lower two bays and standard 6-32 screws in the upper
bay. Four of each are installed on the hard drive bracket under the access panel. All other drives
use M3 metric screws, eight of which are installed on the optical drive bracket under the access
panel. The HP-supplied metric guide screws are black. The HP-supplied 6-32 isolation mounting
guide screws are silver and blue. The HP-supplied standard 6-32 screws are silver. If you are
Drives
95
replacing the primary hard drive, you must remove the four silver and blue 6-32 isolation
mounting guide screws from the old hard drive and install them in the new hard drive.
Figure 6-19 Extra Guide Screw Locations
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
5.25-inch Drives
2
Silver 6-32 Standard Screws
3.5-inch Hard Drive in the Top Drive Bay (Bay 4)
3
Silver and Blue 6-32 Isolation Mounting Screws
3.5-inch Hard Drives in the Middle and Bottom Drive Bays
(Bays 5 and 6)
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to
Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
96
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the bezel blank. See Bezel
Blanks on page 80 for more information.
5.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive (1). HP has
provided four extra M3 metric guide screws on the 5.25-inch drive bracket under the access
panel. The M3 metric guide screws are black. Refer to Installing Drives on page 95 for an
illustration of the extra M3 metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 6-20 Installing a 5.25-Inch Drive in a Minitower (top) and Desktop (bottom)
6.
Install the drive in the desired drive bay by sliding it all the way into the front of the drive cage
until it locks (2). The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.
Drives
97
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
7.
Connect the power and data cables to the drive as indicated in the following illustrations.
a.
If you are installing an optical drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the back of
the drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the rear of the optical drive bays.
b.
If your are installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable to the USB system board
connector labeled MEDIA.
Figure 6-21 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
8.
If you are installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate
system board connector.
NOTE: If you are installing a new SATA optical drive, connect the data cable for the first optical
drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2. Connect the data cable
for a second optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA3.
Refer to System Board Connections on page 81 for an illustration of the system board drive
connectors.
9.
Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
10. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
98
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay
NOTE: The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.
Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so that you
can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
To install a hard drive in a 3.5-inch internal drive bay:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Install guide screws on the sides of the drive. The type of screws used depends on which drive bay
is being used to house the drive. If you are installing a 2.5-inch drive, you must install the drive in
an adapter bracket.
NOTE: Extra guide screws are installed on the hard drive bracket under the access panel. Refer
to Installing Drives on page 95 for an illustration of the extra guide screw locations.
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.
●
If you are installing a 3.5-inch drive in either of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6), install
four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws (two on each side of the drive).
Figure 6-22 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in a 3.5-inch Hard Drive
●
If you are installing a 2.5-inch hard drive into either of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6),
do the following:
◦
Install four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws in the adapter bracket
(two on each side of the bracket).
Figure 6-23 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in the 2.5-inch Adapter
Bracket
Drives
99
◦
Install the drive into the slot on the adapter bracket with the PCA side facing down,
aligning the three tabs on the bracket with the drive. Ensure that the power and data
connectors on the drive are properly oriented.
Figure 6-24 Installing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
◦
Hold the drive and bracket firmly together and turn the assembly over. Install four M3
screws to secure the drive to the bracket.
Figure 6-25 Securing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
100
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
●
If you are installing the drive in the upper bay (bay 4), install three standard 6-32 silver guide
screws (two on the right side and one on the left side in the screw hole closest to the power
and data connectors).
Figure 6-26 Installing Standard Guide Screws
4.
Insert the hard drive into the bay as follows:
CAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
●
If you are installing a hard drive into one of the lower two bays (bays 5 and 6), slide the
hard drive into the drive bay until it locks. The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the
bay.
Figure 6-27 Installing a Hard Drive into the Lower Two Bays
Drives
101
●
If you are installing a hard drive into the upper bay (bay 4), slide the hard drive into the
drive bay (1) then secure the drive in place with a standard 6-32 screw (2).
Figure 6-28 Installing a Hard Drive into the Upper Bay
5.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the hard drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the hard drives is a three-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the rear of the hard drive bays.
6.
Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system board connector.
NOTE: If your system has only one SATA hard drive, you must connect the hard drive data
cable to the dark blue connector labeled SATA0 to avoid any hard drive performance problems. If
you are adding a second hard drive, connect the data cable to the light blue connector labeled
SATA1.
102
7.
Replace the computer access panel.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Installing a 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay
NOTE: The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.
Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so that you
can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
To install a hard drive in a 3.5-inch internal drive bay:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Install four 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws, two on each side of the drive.
Figure 6-29 Installing the Hard Drive Guide Screws
NOTE: The hard drive uses 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws. Eight extra guide screws are
installed on the hard drive bracket under the access panel. The HP-supplied isolation mounting
guide screws are silver and blue.
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.
Drives
103
4.
Slide the hard drive down into the drive cage until it locks. The drivelock automatically secures the
drive in the bay.
Figure 6-30 Installing a Hard Drive into the Hard Drive Bay
CAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
5.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the hard drive.
6.
Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system board connector.
NOTE: If your system has only one SATA hard drive, you must connect the hard drive data
cable to the dark blue connector labeled SATA0 to avoid any hard drive performance problems. If
you are adding a second hard drive, connect the data cable to the next available (unpopulated)
SATA connector on the system board in the following order: SATA0, SATA1, SATA2, SATA3.
7.
Replace the computer access panel.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
10. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
Removing and Replacing a Removable 3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive
Some models are equipped with a Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure in the 5.25-inch external
drive bay. The hard drive is housed in a carrier that can be quickly and easily removed from the drive
bay. To remove and replace a drive in the carrier:
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
1.
104
Unlock the hard drive carrier with the key provided and slide the carrier out of the enclosure.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
2.
Remove the screw from the rear of the carrier (1) and slide the top cover off the carrier (2).
Figure 6-31 Removing the Carrier Cover
3.
Remove the adhesive strip that secures the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive (1) and
move the thermal sensor away from the carrier (2).
Figure 6-32 Removing the Thermal Sensor
Drives
105
4.
Remove the four screws from the bottom of the hard drive carrier.
Figure 6-33 Removing the Security Screws
5.
Slide the hard drive back to disconnect it from the carrier then lift it up and out of the carrier.
Figure 6-34 Removing the Hard Drive
106
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.
Place the new hard drive in the carrier then slide the hard drive back so that it seats in the SATA
connector on the carrier's circuit board. Be sure the connector on the hard drive is pressed all the
way into the connector on the carrier's circuit board.
Figure 6-35 Replacing the Hard Drive
7.
Replace the four screws in the bottom of the carrier to hold the drive securely in place.
Figure 6-36 Replacing the Security Screws
Drives
107
8.
Place the thermal sensor on top of the hard drive in a position that does not cover the label (1)
and attach the thermal sensor to the top of the hard drive with the adhesive strip (2).
Figure 6-37 Replacing the Thermal Sensor
9.
Slide the cover on the carrier (1) and replace the screw on the rear of the carrier to secure the
cover in place (2).
Figure 6-38 Replacing the Carrier Cover
10. Slide the hard drive carrier into the enclosure on the computer and lock it with the key provided.
NOTE: The carrier must be locked for power to be supplied to the hard drive.
108
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
The hood sensor is located on the top of the rear chassis panel.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Unplug the hood sensor cable from the connector labeled HSENSE on the system board (1).
4.
Slide the hood sensor straight out of the slot in the chassis (2).
Figure 6-39 Removing the hood sensor
To reinstall the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
Hood Sensor
109
Front I/O, USB Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O and USB assembly
646821-001
The front I/O, USB assembly is mounted to the front of the chassis and is removed by pulling it away
from the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Disconnect the three cables from the following system board connectors:
●
Yellow connector labeled FRONT USB
●
Green connector labeled FRONT USB2
●
Blue connector labeled FRONT AUD
NOTE: The blue FRONT AUD connector is not located near the other two connectors used
for the front I/O assembly. See the following image for its location.
110
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
5.
Remove the screw that secures the assembly to the front of the chassis.
6.
Rotate the right side of the assembly away from the chassis.
Figure 6-40 Removing the front I/O, USB, power switch assembly
7.
Pull the assembly toward the right and away from the chassis while threading the wires through
the slot between the drive cage and chassis front and the hole in the front of the chassis.
To reinstall the assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
Front I/O, USB Assembly
111
Power Switch Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Power switch/LED assembly
646820-001
The power switch assembly is mounted to the front of the chassis and removed by pulling it away from
the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the computer access panel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Disconnect the cable from the black system board connector labeled PB/LED.
5.
Press downward on the tabs (1) at the top of the assembly.
6.
Rotate the top of the assembly downward (2), and then pull it away from the chassis while
threading the wires through the hole in the front of the chassis.
Figure 6-41 Removing the power switch assembly
To install the power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
112
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
645330-001
The speaker is mounted to the inside front of the chassis with two screws.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the white system board connector labeled SPKR (1).
4.
From the inside of the unit, remove the two screws (2) that secure the speaker to the front of the
chassis.
5.
Rotate the top of the speaker downward slightly, and then remove it from the chassis (3).
Figure 6-42 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
Speaker
113
Rear Chassis Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear chassis fan
643908-001
The rear fan is mounted to the rear chassis wall and secured by four Phillips screws.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Disconnect the fan control cable (1) from the red/brown system board labeled CHFAN2.
4.
Remove the four screws (2) that secure the fan housing to the chassis.
5.
Remove the fan from the chassis (3).
Figure 6-43 Removing the rear chassis fan
To install the fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the unit.
114
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Fan sink
Description
Spare part number
Fan sink
643907-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
In the order indicated, loosen the four captive screws that secure the fan sink to the system board.
CAUTION: Fan sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Figure 6-44 Loosening the fan sink screws
4.
Disconnect the fan cable from the white system board connector labeled CPUFAN (1).
Fan sink
115
5.
Lift the fan sink from the processor (2).
Figure 6-45 Removing the fan sink
When reinstalling the fan sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Fan sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the fan sink on the processor. Failure to do so could result in damage that requires
replacing the system board.
116
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processor
2600, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
638632-001
Intel Core i5 processors
2500, 3.3 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638631-001
2400, 3.1 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638630-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
2100, 3.1 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638628-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Fan sink on page 115).
4.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor
117
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 6-46 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
118
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer. Make sure the slot in the processor fits into
the post on the socket.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
2.
Secure the locking lever.
Figure 6-47 Installing the processor
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of
the processor.
4.
Clean the bottom of the heat sink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor
119
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
Power supply, 320W
613765-001
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
The power supply is secured to the rear of the chassis by four Torx screws. A lever on the chassis floor
also holds the power supply in place.
120
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Disconnect all power cables from the system board as follows:
●
white 4-pin PWRCPU
●
white 4-pin PWR
●
white 6-pin PWRCMD
4.
Remove the power cables from the white plastic clamp on the chassis floor.
5.
Remove the four Torx screws (1) that secure the power supply to the chassis.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.
Press the tab (2) in front of the power supply, slide the power supply toward the front of the
computer, and then lift the power supply out of the chassis (3).
Figure 6-48 Removing the power supply
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (includes replacement thermal material)
611835-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (includes replacement thermal material)
649742-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (seeMemory on page 82)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Card on page 86)
●
Fan sink (Fan sink on page 115).
●
Processor (Processor on page 117)
4.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
5.
Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
System Board
121
6.
Remove the 10 screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
7.
Slide the system board toward the front of the computer so that the connectors loosen from the rear
of the chassis, and then lift the system board out of the computer (2).
Figure 6-49 Removing the system board
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
BIOS.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the fan sink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of
the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
122
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop
Configuration
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
5.
To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, lift the release tab on the green latch drive
bracket for the drive (1). While lifting the release tab, slide the drive from its drive bay (2).
Repeat this step for each 5.25-inch drive.
Figure 6-50 Releasing the 5.25-inch Drives from the Drive Bays (Minitower)
Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration
123
6.
Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
Figure 6-51 Installing a Drive in the Desktop Configuration
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
7.
Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
8.
Remove the bezel subpanel as described in Bezel Blanks on page 80.
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
9.
124
Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the desktop
configuration.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
10. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the bezel.
Figure 6-52 Changing from a Minitower to a Desktop Configuration
11. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower
Configuration
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 77).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 78).
4.
Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration
125
5.
To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, press down on the short yellow drivelock as
shown (1). While pressing the drivelock, pull the drives out of the drive bay (2).
Figure 6-53 Releasing the 5.25-inch Drives from the Drive Bays (Desktop)
6.
Gently slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
Figure 6-54 Installing a Drive in the Minitower Configuration
CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The
bottom bay supports a half-height drive or other device that is no more than 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
in depth. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board. The use of unnecessary force when
installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
126
7.
Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
8.
Remove the bezel subpanel as described in the Bezel Blanks on page 80 section.
Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the
subpanel away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
9.
Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the minitower
configuration.
10. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90º) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the bezel.
Figure 6-55 Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration
11. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
Changing from a Desktop to a Minitower Configuration
127
7
Removal and Replacement
Procedures – Microtower (MT)
Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify
that all components operate properly.
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 61 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8.
As applicable, lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
128
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
Computer Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646825-001
To access internal components, you must remove the access panel:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Loosen the two captive thumbscrews (1) that secure the access panel to the computer chassis.
3.
Use the handle located between the thumbscrews to lift the access panel off the unit (2).
NOTE: You may want to lay the computer on its side to install internal parts. Be sure the side
with the access panel is facing up.
Figure 7-1 Removing the Computer Access Panel
Computer Access Panel
129
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
646826-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 7-2 Removing the Front Bezel
130
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Bezel Blanks
Description
Spare part number
3.5-inch bezel blank, jack black
583653-001
5.25-inch bezel blank, jack black
570838-001
On some models, there are bezel blanks covering the 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch drive bays that need to
be removed before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 130)
3.
To remove a bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards
the outer right edge of the bezel (1) and slide the bezel blank back and to the right to remove it
(2).
Figure 7-3 Removing a Bezel Blank
Bezel Blanks
131
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustrations and tables to identify the system board connectors for your model.
Figure 7-4 8200 Elite Series System Board Connections
Table 7-1 8200 Elite Series System Board Connections
132
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
5
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Optical Drives
6
Power
SATAPWR1
black
SATA Hard Drives
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical
Drive if an ESATA Adapter Cable
exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
15
USB
MEDIA2
black
Second Media Card Reader
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Table 7-1 8200 Elite Series System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
16
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI
white
Expansion Card
Figure 7-5 6200 Pro Series System Board Connections
Table 7-2 6200 Pro Series System Board Connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
5
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Optical Drives
6
Power
SATAPWR1
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 2.0
SATA1
white
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical
Drive if an eSATA Adapter Cable
exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
SATA Hard Drives
System Board Connections
133
Table 7-2 6200 Pro Series System Board Connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
15
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
16
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x1
X4PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI
white
Expansion Card
Memory
Description
Spare part number
4-GB, PC3-10600
585157-001
2-GB, PC3-10600
635803-001
1-GB, PC3-10600
635802-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a highperforming dual channel mode.
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
134
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-8500 DDR3-1066 MHz-compliant or PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 MHzcompliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 7 DDR3 1066 MHz (7-7-7 timing) and CAS latency 9 DDR3 1333 MHz
(9-9-9 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one channel
only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity of
the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. The
technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual
channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels should
be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels. If one
channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to Channel
A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB DIMMs,
Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel B should
Memory
135
be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as dual
channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
136
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
3.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 7-6 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with
the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as equally
as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets on page 135
for more information.
4.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install any additional modules.
6.
Replace the computer access panel.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Memory
137
Expansion Cards
Description
Spare part number
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
nVidia GF405, DVI/VGA PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
641732-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
ATI Radeon HD6570 PCIe x16 graphics card, 1 GB
637997-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 Card
637591-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
The 8200 Elite computer has one PCI expansion slot, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot, one PCI
Express x16 expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to a x4 slot.
The 6200 Pro computer has one PCI expansion slot, two PCI Express x1 expansion slots, and one PCI
Express x16 expansion slot.
NOTE: You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slot.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express x16
slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot (8200 Elite models).
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
138
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding expansion
slot on the back of the computer chassis.
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
4.
Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab on the
latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
Figure 7-7 Opening the Expansion Slot Retainer
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up then away from the inside
of the chassis.
Figure 7-8 Removing an Expansion Slot Cover
Expansion Cards
139
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end,
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the
expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the inside of the chassis to release
it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.
Figure 7-9 Removing a Standard PCI Expansion Card
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then
away from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape
the card against the other components.
Figure 7-10 Removing a PCI Express x16 Expansion Card
6.
140
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
8.
To install a new expansion card, hold the card just above the expansion socket on the system
board then move the card toward the rear of the chassis so that the bracket on the card is aligned
with the open slot on the rear of the chassis. Press the card straight down into the expansion
socket on the system board.
Figure 7-11 Installing an Expansion Card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector
seats properly in the expansion card slot.
9.
Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
Figure 7-12 Closing the Expansion Slot Retainer
Expansion Cards
141
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
12. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
13. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
14. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
Drive Positions
Figure 7-13 Drive Positions
Table 7-3 Drive Positions
1
Two 5.25-inch drive bays for optional drives (optical drives shown)
2
One 3.5-inch drive bay for optional drive (media card reader shown)
3
Secondary 3.5-inch internal hard drive bay for optional hard drive
4
Primary 3.5-inch internal hard drive bay
NOTE: The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive
configuration shown above.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
142
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Drives
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
750 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
632938-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
320 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA3 hard drive
639695-001
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA2 hard drive
648963-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive
639694-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
508312-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
646809-001
80 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
607817-001
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue primary SATA
connector on the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it
to the light blue connector (8200 Elite models) or the white connector (6200 Pro models) on the
system board labeled SATA1.
●
Connect the first SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled
SATA2. If you are adding a second optical drive connect it to the black SATA connector on the
system board labeled ESATA. If the ESATA connector is already populated, connect the second
optical drive to the light blue connector on the system board labeled SATA1 (8200 Elite models)
or the white connector labeled SATA1 (6200 Pro models).
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA optical drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the top 5.25-inch bay and the second connector routed to
the bottom 5.25-inch bay.
Drives
143
●
The power cable for the SATA hard drives is a two-headed cable this is plugged into the system
board with the first connector routed to the bottom 3.5-inch bay and the second connector routed
to the top 3.5-inch bay.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in
place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (four 6-32 isolation mounting guide
screws and eight M3 metric guide screws), installed on the side of the drive bays. The 6-32
isolation mounting screws are required for a secondary hard drive. All other drives (except the
primary hard drive) use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black and the HPsupplied isolation mounting screws are silver and blue. If you are replacing the primary hard
drive, you must remove the four silver and blue 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws from the old
hard drive and install them in the new hard drive.
Figure 7-14 Extra Guide Screw Locations
144
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
All Drives (except hard drives)
2
Silver and Blue 6-32 Isolation Mounting Screws
Secondary Hard Drive
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
Removing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 130)
4.
Disconnect the drive cables, as indicated in the following illustrations.
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
a.
If you are removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the
back of the drive.
Drives
145
b.
If you are removing a media card reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board.
Figure 7-15 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
5.
A latch drive bracket with release tabs secures the drives in the drive bay. Lift the release tab on
the latch drive bracket (1) for the drive you want to remove, then slide the drive from its drive bay
(2).
Figure 7-16 Removing the Drives
146
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Installing a 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 130)
4.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the bezel blank. See Bezel
Blanks on page 131 for more information.
5.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive. HP has provided
eight extra M3 metric guide screws on the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The M3
metric guide screws are black. Refer to Drives on page 143 for an illustration of the extra M3
metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 7-17 Installing Guide Screws (Optical Drive Shown)
6.
Slide the drive into the drive bay, making sure to align the guide screws with the guide slots, until
the drive snaps into place.
Figure 7-18 Sliding the Drives into the Drive Cage
Drives
147
7.
Connect the power and data cables to the drive as indicated in the following illustrations.
a.
If you are installing an optical drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the back of
the drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the rear of the optical drive bays.
b.
If your are installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable to the USB system board
connector labeled MEDIA.
Figure 7-19 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
8.
If installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system
board connector.
NOTE: If you are installing a new SATA optical drive, connect the data cable for the first optical
drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2. Connect the data cable
for a second optical drive to the black SATA connector on the system board labeled ESATA. If the
ESATA connector is already populated, connect the second optical drive to the light blue
connector (8200 Elite models) or the white connector (6200 Pro models) labeled SATA1.
Refer to System Board Connections on page 132 for an illustration of the system board drive
connectors.
9.
Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
10. Reconnect the power cord and any external devices, then turn on the computer.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
148
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Removing a Hard Drive from a Drive Bay
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back of the hard drive.
4.
Release the drive by pulling the release tab away from the drive (1) and sliding the drive out of
the bay (2).
Figure 7-20 Removing a Hard Drive
5.
Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive. You will need these screws to
install a new drive.
Installing a Hard Drive into an Internal Drive Bay
NOTE: The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) hard drives.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 128)
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129)
3.
Install guide screws on the sides of the drive. If you are installing a 2.5-inch drive, you must install
the drive in an adapter bracket.
Drives
149
NOTE: The hard drive uses 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws. Four extra guide screws are
installed on the exterior of the hard drive bays. The HP-supplied isolation mounting guide screws
are silver and blue. Refer to Drives on page 143 for an illustration of the extra 6-32 isolation
mounting guide screws location.
If you are replacing a drive, transfer the guides screws from the old drive to the new one.
●
If you are installing a 3.5-inch hard drive, install four isolation mounting guide screws (two
on each side of the drive).
Figure 7-21 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in a 3.5-inch Drive
●
If you are installing a 2.5-inch hard drive:
◦
Install four 6-32 silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws in the adapter bracket
(two on each side of the bracket).
Figure 7-22 Installing Isolation Mounting Guide Screws in the 2.5-inch Adapter
Bracket
150
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
◦
Install the drive into the slot on the adapter bracket with the PCA side facing down,
aligning the three tabs on the bracket with the drive. Ensure that the power and data
connectors on the drive are properly oriented.
Figure 7-23 Installing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
◦
Hold the drive and bracket firmly together and turn the assembly over. Install four M3
screws to secure the drive to the bracket.
Figure 7-24 Securing the Drive in the Adapter Bracket
Drives
151
4.
Slide the drive into the drive bay, making sure to align the guide screws with the guide slots, until
the drive snaps into place. The bottom bay is for the primary hard drive. The upper bay is for an
optional secondary hard drive.
Figure 7-25 Sliding a Hard Drive into the Drive Bay
5.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the back of the hard drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the hard drives is a two-headed cable that is routed from the system
board to the rear of the hard drive bays.
6.
If installing a new drive, connect the opposite end of the data cable to the appropriate system
board connector.
NOTE: If your system has only one SATA hard drive, you must connect the hard drive data
cable to the dark blue connector labeled SATA0 to avoid any hard drive performance problems. If
you are adding a second hard drive, connect the data cable to the light blue connector (8200
Elite models) or the white connector (6200 Pro models) labeled SATA1.
7.
Route the power and data cables in their cable retainers.
8.
Replace the computer access panel.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and any external devices, then turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
152
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Front Fan Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front fan assembly
585884-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the cables from the clip on the top of the fan assembly.
Figure 7-26 Removing the cables from atop the front fan assembly
4.
Unplug the fan cable from the system board connector labeled CHFAN.
Front Fan Assembly
153
5.
Press the lever that secures the assembly to the chassis (1), pivot the assembly forward toward the
front of the computer (2), and then lift the assembly straight up and out of the computer (3).
Figure 7-27 Removing the front fan assembly
To reinstall the front fan, reverse the removal procedure.
154
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Front I/O Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O assembly
646827-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 130).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 153).
5.
Disconnect the three front I/O cables (yellow, green, and blue) from the system board connectors
(FRONT USB1, FRONT USB2, and FRONT AUD).
6.
Remove the Torx screw that secures the assembly to the chassis.
Figure 7-28 Removing the front I/O assembly screw
7.
Rotate the left side of the assembly to the right .
Figure 7-29 Removing the front I/O assembly
8.
Pull the assembly away from the computer while threading the wires through the hole in the front
of the chassis.
To reinstall the assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
Front I/O Assembly
155
Power Switch/LED Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Power switch/LED assembly
646828-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 130).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 153).
5.
Disconnect the cable from the system board connector labeled PB/LED.
6.
With the computer on its side, press on the tabs on the bottom of the assembly (1) to disengage
the assembly from the chassis, and then rotate the bottom of the assembly upward (2) to remove it
from the chassis.
Figure 7-30 Removing the power switch/LED
7.
156
Pull the assembly away from the chassis while threading the cable through the hole in front of the
chassis.
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
645326-001
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 153).
4.
Loosen the four silver captive Torx screws that secure the heat sink to the system board.
CAUTION: Remove heat sink retaining screws in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to even
the downward forces on the processor. The pins on the socket are very fragile and any damage to
them may require replacing the system board.
Heat sink
157
5.
Lift the heat sink from atop the processor.
When reinstalling the heat sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X)
to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are
very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
158
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processor
2600, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
638632-001
Intel Core i5 processors
2500, 3.3 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638631-001
2400, 3.1 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638630-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
2100, 3.1 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638628-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 157).
4.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor
159
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
160
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2.
Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of
the processor.
4.
Clean the bottom of the heat sink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the four captive screws and
attach the heat sink control cable to the system board.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor
161
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
645330-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 153).
4.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board connector labeled SPKR.
5.
From the inside of the chassis, remove the two silver Torx screws (1) that secure the speaker to the
chassis.
6.
Rotate the top of the speaker downward (2), and then remove it from the chassis.
Figure 7-31 Removing the speaker
To replace the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
162
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Rear Chassis Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear chassis fan
636922-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the four silver Phillips screws that secure the fan to the chassis.
Figure 7-32 Rear fan screws
4.
Disconnect the fan control cable (1) from the system board connector labeled CHFAN2.
Rear Chassis Fan
163
5.
Lift the fan out of the chassis (2).
Figure 7-33 Removing the rear fan
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of the unit.
164
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 320W, 90% efficient
613764-001
Power supply, 320W
613765-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Disconnect the power cables from the white 6-pin system board connector labeled PWR and the 4pin white system board connector labeled P3.
4.
Remove the power cables from the clip on the base pan.
5.
Remove the four silver Torx screws that connect the power supply to the chassis.
Figure 7-34 Power supply screws
6.
Press the tab (1) on the base pan in front of the power supply that holds it in place.
Power Supply
165
7.
Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer (2), rotate toward the fan so the power
supply clears the lip on the top of the chassis, and then lift the power supply out of the chassis (3).
Figure 7-35 Removing the power supply
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
166
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
System Board
Description
Spare part number
For use in 8200 Elite Series models:
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (includes thermal material)
611834-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
649741-001
For use in 6200 Pro Series models:
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (includes thermal material)
649515-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
615114-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 76).
2.
Remove the access panel (Computer Access Panel on page 129).
3.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 153).
4.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (seeMemory on page 134)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Cards on page 138)
●
Heat sink (Heat sink on page 157).
●
Processor (Processor on page 159)
5.
Remove all expansion boards (Expansion Cards on page 138).
6.
Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
System Board
167
7.
Remove the eight screws that secure the system board to the chassis.
Figure 7-36 System board screws
8.
Slide the system board toward the front of the computer to disengage the I/O panel (1), lift the
rear of the system board up at an angle (2), and then lift the system board out of the computer
(3).
Figure 7-37 Removing the system board
When reinstalling the system board, first insert the I/O panel back into the slots in the rear of the
chassis, and then align the board with the chassis screw holes.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must change the chassis serial number in the BIOS.
168
Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Microtower (MT) Chassis
8
Removal and Replacement
Procedures – Small Form Factor
(SFF) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify
that all components operate properly.
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 61 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any compact disc or media card from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
Preparation for Disassembly
169
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646815-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
If the computer is on a stand, remove the computer from the stand.
3.
Lift up on the access panel handle (1) then lift the access panel off the computer (2).
Figure 8-1 Removing the access panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
170
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
646814-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 8-2 Removing the front bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Bezel
171
Bezel Blanks
On some models, there are bezel blanks covering the 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch external drive bays that
need to be removed before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 171)..
3.
To remove a bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards
the outer right edge of the bezel (1) and slide the bezel blank back and to the right to remove it
(2).
Figure 8-3 Removing a bezel blank
4.
Replace the front bezel.
Memory
Description
Spare part number
4-GB, PC3-10600
585157-001
2-GB, PC3-10600
635803-001
1-GB, PC3-10600
635802-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard DIMMs.
These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled DIMM. To achieve the maximum
memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 16-GB of memory configured in a highperforming dual channel mode.
172
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the DIMM or invoke system malfunction.
For proper system operation, the DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 240-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-8500 DDR3-1066 MHz-compliant or PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 MHzcompliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 7 DDR3 1066 MHz (7-7-7 timing) and CAS latency 9 DDR3 1333 MHz
(9-9-9 timing)
●
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided DIMMs
●
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported DIMMs.
Populating DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled DIMM1, DIMM2, DIMM3, and DIMM4. Sockets DIMM1 and DIMM2 operate in memory
channel B. Sockets DIMM3 and DIMM4 operate in memory channel A.
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one channel
only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory capacity of
the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. The
technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if Channel A is
populated with two 1-GB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one 2-GB DIMM, the system
will operate in dual channel mode.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is
not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel
populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual
Memory
173
channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed, the channels should
be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the two channels. If one
channel will have more memory than the other, the larger amount should be assigned to Channel
A. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 2-GB DIMM, and three 1-GB DIMMs,
Channel A should be populated with the 2-GB DIMM and one 1-GB DIMM, and Channel B should
be populated with the other two 1-GB DIMMs. With this configuration, 4-GB will run as dual
channel and 1-GB will run as single channel.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the system.
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
174
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Rotate up the internal drive bay housing to access the memory module sockets on the system
board.
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
4.
Open both latches of the memory module socket (1), and insert the memory module into the
socket (2).
Figure 8-4 Installing a DIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with
the tab on the memory socket.
Populate the black DIMM sockets before the white DIMM sockets.
For maximum performance, populate the sockets so that the memory capacity is spread as equally
as possible between Channel A and Channel B. Refer to Populating DIMM Sockets on page 173
for more information.
5.
Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and properly
seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install any additional modules.
7.
Replace the access panel.
8.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
The computer should automatically recognize the additional memory the next time you turn on the
computer.
Memory
175
Expansion Card
Description
Spare part number
Graphics cards
nVidia Quadro NVS295 PCIe x16 graphics card, 256 MB
641462-001
nVidia Quadro NVS300 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
632486-001
ATI Radeon HD6350 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637995-001
ATI Radeon HD6450 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637996-001
AMD FirePro 2270 PCIe x16 graphics card, 512 MB
637213-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
HP FireWire / IEEE 1394a PCIe x1 card
637591-001
Ports
eSATA port assembly, PCI card
645558-001
USB 3.0 port, PCIe x1 card
616610-001
Serial port, PCI card
638815-001
Printer port, PCI card
638817-001
Other boards/cards
HP WLAN 802.11b/g/n card
538048-001
Intel PRO/1000CT NIC, includes bracket
635523-001
The 8200 Elite computer has one PCI expansion slot, one PCI Express x1 expansion slot, one PCI
Express x16 expansion slot, and one PCI Express x16 expansion slot that is downshifted to a x4 slot.
The 6200 Pro computer has one PCI expansion slot, two PCI Express x1 expansion slots, and one PCI
Express x16 expansion slot.
NOTE: The PCI and PCI Express slots support only low profile cards.
You can install a PCI Express x1, x4, x8, or x16 expansion card in the PCI Express x16 slot.
For dual graphics card configurations, the first (primary) card must be installed in the PCI Express x16
slot that is NOT downshifted to a x4 slot (8200 Elite models).
To remove, replace, or add an expansion card:
176
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding expansion
slot on the back of the computer chassis.
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
4.
Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab on the
latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
Figure 8-5 Opening the expansion slot retainer
5.
Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing expansion
card.
NOTE: Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be
attached to the expansion card.
a.
If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up then away from the inside
of the chassis.
Figure 8-6 Removing an expansion slot cover
Expansion Card
177
b.
If you are removing a standard PCI card or PCI Express x1 card, hold the card at each end,
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the
expansion card straight up from the socket (1) then away from the inside of the chassis to
release it from the chassis frame (2). Be sure not to scrape the card against the other
components.
Figure 8-7 Removing a standard PCI expansion card
c.
If you are removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the
expansion socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the
connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then
away from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape
the card against the other components.
Figure 8-8 Removing a PCI Express x16 expansion card
6.
178
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.
If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the open
slot.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or
expansion slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
8.
To install a new expansion card, hold the card just above the expansion socket on the system
board then move the card toward the rear of the chassis (1) so that the bracket on the card is
aligned with the open slot on the rear of the chassis. Press the card straight down into the
expansion socket on the system board (2).
Figure 8-9 Installing an expansion card
NOTE: When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector
seats properly in the expansion card slot.
9.
Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
Figure 8-10 Closing the expansion slot retainer
Expansion Card
179
10. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
11. Replace the computer access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
15. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary.
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors for your model.
Figure 8-11 8200 Elite Series system board connections
Table 8-1 8200 Elite Series system board connections
180
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
5
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Optical Drives
6
Power
SATAPWR1
black
SATA Hard Drives
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical
Drive if an ESATA Adapter Cable
exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Table 8-1 8200 Elite Series system board connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
15
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
16
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x16 downshifted
to a x4
X4PCIEXP
white
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI
white
Expansion Card
Figure 8-12 6200 Pro Series system board connections
Table 8-2 6200 Pro Series system board connections
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
DIMM4 (Channel A)
DIMM4
white
Memory Module
2
DIMM3 (Channel A)
DIMM3
black
Memory Module
3
DIMM2 (Channel B)
DIMM2
white
Memory Module
4
DIMM1 (Channel B)
DIMM1
black
Memory Module
System Board Connections
181
Table 8-2 6200 Pro Series system board connections (continued)
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
5
Power
SATAPWR0
black
SATA Optical Drives
6
Power
SATAPWR1
7
SATA 3.0
SATA0
dark blue
1st Hard Drive
8
SATA 2.0
SATA1
white
2nd Hard Drive, or 2nd Optical
Drive if an eSATA Adapter Cable
exists
9
SATA 2.0
SATA2
white
1st Optical Drive
10
eSATA
ESATA
black
eSATA Adapter Cable, or 2nd
Optical Drive
11
Parallel Port
PAR
black
Parallel Port
12
Serial Port
COMB
black
Serial Port
13
USB
MEDIA
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
14
Hood Lock
HLCK
black
Hood Lock
15
USB
MEDIA2
black
USB Device, such as a Media Card
Reader
16
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
17
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
18
PCI Express x1
X4PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
19
PCI Express x16
X16PCIEXP
black
Expansion Card
20
PCI
PCI
white
Expansion Card
SATA Hard Drives
Drives
182
Description
Spare part number
16X SATA DVD±RW drive with LightScribe
581600-001
16X SATA DVD-ROM drive
581599-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
617030-001
1 TB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636930-001
750 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
632938-001
500 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636929-001
320 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
634824-001
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA3 hard drive
639695-001
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Description
Spare part number
300 GB, 10000-RPM SATA2 hard drive
648963-001
250 GB, 7200 rpm SATA hard drive
636927-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive
639694-001
160 GB, 10000-RPM SATA hard drive, 2.5-inch
508312-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
646809-001
80 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
607817-001
Drive Positions
Figure 8-13 Drive positions
Table 8-3 Drive Positions
1
3.5-inch internal hard drive bay
2
3.5-inch drive bay for optional drives (media card reader shown)
3
5.25-inch drive bay for optional drives (optical drive shown)
NOTE: The drive configuration on your computer may be different than the drive
configuration shown above.
To verify the type and size of the storage devices installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Drives
183
Installing and Removing Drives
When installing drives, follow these guidelines:
●
The primary Serial ATA (SATA) hard drive must be connected to the dark blue primary SATA
connector on the system board labeled SATA0. If you are adding a second hard drive, connect it
to the light blue connector (8200 Elite models) or the white connector (6200 Pro models) on the
system board labeled SATA1.
●
Connect a SATA optical drive to the white SATA connector on the system board labeled SATA2.
●
Connect an optional eSATA adapter cable to the black SATA connector on the system board
labeled ESATA.
●
Connect a media card reader USB cable to the USB connector on the system board labeled
MEDIA.
●
The power cable for the SATA drives is a three-headed cable that is plugged into the system board
with the first connector routed to the rear of the hard drive, the second connector routed to the rear
of the 3.5” drive, and the third connector routed to the rear of the 5.25” optical drive.
●
The system does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) optical drives or PATA hard drives.
●
You must install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in
place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (five 6-32 standard screws and four
M3 metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The 6-32 standard
screws are required for a secondary hard drive. All other drives (except the primary hard drive)
use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black and the HP-supplied standard
screws are silver. If you are replacing the primary hard drive, you must remove the four silver and
blue 6-32 isolation mounting guide screws from the old hard drive and install them in the new
hard drive.
Figure 8-14 Extra Guide Screw Locations
184
No.
Guide Screw
Device
1
Black M3 Metric Screws
All Drives (except primary and secondary hard drives)
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
2
Silver 6-32 Standard Screws
Secondary Hard Drive
There are at total of five extra silver 6-32 standard screws. Four are used as guide screws for a secondary
hard drive. The fifth is used for bezel security.
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a drive, shut down the operating system properly, turn off the
computer, and unplug the power cord. Do not remove a drive while the computer is on or in standby
mode.
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to
Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
4.
If removing an optical drive, disconnect the power cable and data cable from the rear of the
optical drive.
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
5.
Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.
Drives
185
6.
Press down on the green drive retainer button located on the left side of the drive to disengage the
drive from the drive cage (1). While pressing the drive retainer button, slide the drive back until it
stops, then lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).
Figure 8-15 Removing the 5.25-inch Drive
Installing a 5.25-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then
remove the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 172 for more information.
4.
Install four M3 metric guide screws in the lower holes on each side of the drive. HP has provided
four extra M3 metric guide screws on the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. The M3 metric
guide screws are black. Refer to Installing and Removing Drives on page 184 for an illustration of
the extra M3 metric guide screws location.
NOTE: When replacing the drive, transfer the four M3 metric guide screws from the old drive to
the new one.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the
internal components of the drive.
Figure 8-16 Installing Guide Screws in the Optical Drive
186
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
5.
Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive toward
the front of the computer until it locks into place.
Figure 8-17 Installing the Optical Drive
6.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
7.
Connect the SATA data cable to the white SATA system board connector labeled SATA2.
8.
Route the data cable through the cable guides.
CAUTION: There are two cable guides that keep the data cable from being pinched by the
drive cage when raising or lowering it. One is located on the bottom side of the drive cage. The
other is located on the chassis frame under the drive cage. Ensure that the data cable is routed
through these guides before connecting it to the optical drive.
9.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the optical drive.
NOTE: The power cable for the optical drive is a three-headed cable that is routed from the
system board to the hard drive, then to the rear of the optical drive.
10. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch any cables or wires when rotating the drive cage down.
11. Replace the front bezel (if removed) and access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Removing a 3.5-inch Drive from a Drive Bay
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
Drives
187
The 3.5-inch drive is located underneath the 5.25-inch drive. You must remove the 5.25-inch drive
before removing the 3.5-inch drive.
1.
Follow the procedure in Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay on page 185 to remove the
5.25-inch drive and access the 3.5-inch drive.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from
the electrical outlet before proceeding.
2.
Disconnect the drive cables from the rear of the drive, or, if you are removing a media card
reader, disconnect the USB cable from the system board as indicated in the following illustration.
Figure 8-18 Disconnecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
3.
Press down on the green drive retainer button located on the left side of the drive to disengage the
drive from the drive cage (1). While pressing the drive retainer button, slide the drive back until it
stops, then lift it up and out of the drive cage (2).
Figure 8-19 Removing a 3.5-inch Drive (Media Card Reader Shown)
Installing a 3.5-inch Drive into a Drive Bay
The 3.5-inch bay is located underneath the 5.25-inch drive. To install a drive into the 3.5-inch bay:
188
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
NOTE: Install guide screws to ensure the drive will line up correctly in the drive cage and lock in
place. HP has provided extra guide screws for the drive bays (four 6-32 standard screws and four M3
metric screws), installed in the front of the chassis, under the front bezel. A secondary hard drive uses
6-32 standard screws. All other drives (except the primary hard drive) use M3 metric screws. The HPsupplied M3 metric screws are black and the HP-supplied 6-32 standard screws are silver. Refer to
Installing and Removing Drives on page 184 for illustrations of the guide screw locations.
1.
Follow the procedure in Removing a 5.25-inch Drive from a Drive Bay on page 185 to remove the
5.25-inch drive and access the 3.5-inch drive bay.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from
the electrical outlet before proceeding.
2.
If you are installing a drive in a bay covered by a bezel blank, remove the front bezel then
remove the bezel blank. See Bezel Blanks on page 172 for more information.
3.
Install guide screws in the holes on each side of the drive.
Figure 8-20 Installing Guide Screws (Media Card Reader Shown)
4.
Position the guide screws on the drive into the J-slots in the drive bay. Then slide the drive toward
the front of the computer until it locks into place.
Figure 8-21 Installing a Drive into the 3.5-inch Drive Bay (Media Card Reader Shown)
5.
Connect the appropriate drive cables:
a.
If installing a second hard drive, connect the power cable and data cable to the rear of the
drive and connect the other end of the data cable to the light blue connector (8200 Elite
models) or the white connector (6200 Pro models) on the system board labeled SATA1.
Drives
189
b.
If installing a media card reader, connect the USB cable from the media card reader to the
USB connector on the system board labeled MEDIA.
Figure 8-22 Connecting the Media Card Reader USB Cable
NOTE: Refer to System Board Connections on page 180 for an illustration of the system
board drive connectors.
6.
Replace the 5.25-inch drive.
7.
Replace the front bezel (if removed) and access panel.
8.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
9.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
10. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
Removing and Replacing the Primary 3.5-inch Internal Hard Drive
NOTE: Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so
that you can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
The preinstalled 3.5-inch hard drive is located under the power supply. To remove and replace the
hard drive:
190
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Rotate the drive cage for internal drives to its upright position.
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
4.
Rotate the power supply to its upright position. The hard drive is located beneath the power
supply.
Figure 8-23 Raising the Power Supply
5.
Disconnect the power cable and data cable from the back of the hard drive.
6.
Press down on the green release latch next to the hard drive (1). While holding the latch down,
slide the drive forward until it stops, then lift the drive up and out of the bay (2).
Figure 8-24 Removing the Hard Drive
Drives
191
7.
To install a hard drive, you must transfer the silver and blue isolation mounting guide screws from
the old hard drive to the new hard drive.
Figure 8-25 Installing Hard Drive Guide Screws
8.
Align the guide screws with the slots on the chassis drive cage, press the hard drive down into the
bay, then slide it back until it stops and locks in place.
Figure 8-26 Installing the Hard Drive
9.
Connect the power cable and data cable to the back of the hard drive.
NOTE: If the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the
dark blue connector labeled SATA0 on the system board to avoid any hard drive performance
problems.
10. Rotate the drive cage for internal drives and the power supply down to their normal positions.
11. Replace the access panel.
12. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
13. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
14. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
192
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Fan duct
Description
Spare part number
Fan duct
636921-001
The fan duct sits between the front fan and the heat sink.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Lift the fan duct straight up out of the chassis.
Figure 8-27 Removing the fan duct
To install the fan duct, reverse the removal procedure.
Fan duct
193
Front Fan Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front fan
645327-001
The front fan assembly is attached to the front of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 171).
4.
Remove the baffle (Fan duct on page 193).
5.
Disconnect the fan cable from the red/brown system board connector labeled CHFAN1.
Figure 8-28 Disconnecting the front fan cable
6.
194
Press the tabs that secure the fan assembly to the front of the chassis (1).
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.
Pull the assembly toward the rear of the unit (2), and then lift it out of the chassis.
Figure 8-29 Removing the front fan
To install the front fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the unit.
Front Fan Assembly
195
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
The hood sensor is attached in a slot in the rear of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Unplug the sensor cable from the system board connector labeled HSENSE (1).
4.
Slide the hood sensor straight out of the notch in the chassis (2).
NOTE: A flat blade screwdriver can be used to push the hood sensor out of the slot.
Figure 8-30 Removing the hood sensor from the chassis fan
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
196
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly
Description
Spare part number
Front I/O and power switch assembly
636926-001
The front I/O and power switch/LEDs is one assembly, attached to the front of the chassis. Push the
assembly into the chassis to remove.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 171).
4.
Remove the chassis fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 194).
5.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
6.
Disconnect the four cables from the system board as follows:
●
Yellow connector labeled FRONT USB
●
Green connector labeled FRONT USB2
●
Blue connector labeled FRONT AUD
●
Black connector labeled PB/LED
Figure 8-31 Disconnecting the front I/O, power switch/LED assembly cables
7.
Remove the screw (1) that secures the assembly to the front of the chassis.
Front I/O, Power Switch Assembly
197
8.
Route the cables through the slots beneath the drive cage, rotate the assembly into the chassis (2),
and then remove the assembly from the computer.
Figure 8-32 Removing the front I/O, power switch/LED assembly screw
To install the front I/O and power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Be sure to correctly route the cables beneath the drive cage when reinstalling the assembly.
Proper cable routing prevents damage to the cables and allows the drive cage to close properly.
198
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
636925-001
The speaker is attached to the front of the chassis under the rotating drive cage.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 171).
4.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
5.
Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board labeled SPKR (1).
6.
Remove the screw that secures the speaker to the chassis (2).
7.
Lift the speaker from the inside of the chassis to remove it (3).
Figure 8-33 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
Speaker
199
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
645326-001
The heat sink is secured atop the processor with four captive Torx screws. The heat sink does not
include a fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Remove the fan duct (Fan duct on page 193).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan Assembly on page 194).
5.
In the order shown, loosen the four captive screws that secure the heat sink to the system board
tray.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an
X) to even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Figure 8-34 Loosening the heat sink screws
200
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
6.
After loosening the screws (1), lift the heat sink from atop the processor (2) and set it on its side to
keep from contaminating the work area with thermal grease.
Figure 8-35 Removing the heat sink
When reinstalling the heat sink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe and
fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X)
to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor to avoid damage that could require replacing the system
board.
Failure to install the fan duct may cause the computer to overheat.
Heat sink
201
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processors
2600, 3.4 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
638632-001
Intel Core i5 processors
2500, 3.3 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638631-001
2400, 3.1 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638630-001
Intel Core i3 processors
202
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
2100, 3.1 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638628-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Remove the fan duct (Fan duct on page 193).
4.
Remove the front fan assembly (Front Fan Assembly on page 194).
5.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 200).
6.
Rotate the locking lever to its full open position (1).
7.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 8-36 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer. Make sure the slot in the processor fits into
the post on the socket.
Processor
203
2.
Secure the locking lever. If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3. If using a new heat sink, go
to step 6.
Figure 8-37 Removing the processor
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean the bottom of the heat sink with the alcohol pad provided in
the spares kit.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heat sink you must clean the top of the processor and the
bottom of the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has
evaporated, apply thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the
spares kit.
4.
Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the heat
sink atop the processor.
5.
Go to step 7.
6.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
204
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Power Supply
Description
Spare part number
Power supply, 90% efficient
613762-001
Power supply, standard
613763-001
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
The rotating power supply is located at the rear of the chassis. It is held in place by a bracket – no
screws are used.
WARNING! Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord
should be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
Rotate the drive cage up and disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.
4.
Disconnect all power cables from the system board as follows:
●
white 4-pin PWRCPU
●
white 4-pin PWR
●
white 6-pin PWRCMD
5.
Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
6.
Release the power supply cables from the cable retaining clip under the drive cage.
Power Supply
205
7.
Pull the power supply forward until the posts on the power supply move forward in the power
supply bracket, and then lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 8-38 Removing the power supply
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so they
are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.
206
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
System Board
Description
Spare part number
For use in 8200 Elite Series models:
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (includes thermal material)
611834-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
649741-001
For use in 6200 Pro Series models:
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (includes thermal material)
649515-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
615114-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Remove the access panel (Access Panel on page 170).
3.
When replacing the system board, make sure the following components are removed from the
defective system board and installed on the replacement system board:
●
Memory modules (seeMemory on page 172)
●
Expansion cards (Expansion Card on page 176)
●
Heat sink (Heat sink on page 200)
●
Processor (Processor on page 202)
4.
Remove the baffle from the chassis (Fan duct on page 193).
5.
Remove the fan from the chassis (Front Fan Assembly on page 194).
6.
Rotate the drive cage to its upright position.
7.
Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
8.
Disconnect all data and power cables from the system board.
9.
Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.
10. Remove the eight screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
System Board
207
11. Lift up the front of the system board, and then pull the system board forward, up, and out of the
chassis (2).
Figure 8-39 Removing the system board
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
BIOS.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heat sink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of
the heat sink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
CAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not
interfere with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.
208
Chapter 8 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower
Orientation
The Small Form Factor computer can be used in a tower orientation. The HP logo plate on the front
bezel is adjustable for either desktop or tower orientation.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 169).
2.
Orient the computer so that its right side is facing down and place the computer in the optional
stand.
Figure 8-40 Changing from Desktop to Tower Orientation
NOTE: To stabilize the computer in a tower orientation, HP recommends the use of the optional
tower stand.
3.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the access panel was removed.
NOTE: Ensure at least 10.2 centimeters (4 inches) of space on all sides of the computer remains clear
and free of obstructions.
Using the Small Form Factor Computer in a Tower Orientation
209
9
Removal and Replacement
Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop
(USDT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics utility to verify
that all components operate properly.
NOTE: Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
Preparation for Disassembly
See Routine Care, SATA Drive Guidelines, and Disassembly Preparation on page 61 for initial safety
procedures.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Close any open software applications.
3.
Exit the operating system.
4.
Remove any compact disc from the computer.
5.
Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as the
system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be
disconnected before servicing a unit.
6.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7.
Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
NOTE: During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing.
Keep all screws with the units removed.
210
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the
wrong screw in an application may damage the unit.
8.
If the PC is mounted in the accessory mounting stand, remove it from the stand.
Access Panel
Description
Spare part number
Access panel
646816-001
To access internal components, you must remove the access panel:
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Loosen the thumbscrew on the rear of the computer (1), slide the access panel toward the rear of
the computer, then lift it off (2).
Figure 9-1 Removing the access panel
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
Access Panel
211
Front Bezel
Description
Spare part number
Front bezel
646817-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Lift up the three tabs on the side of the bezel (1), then rotate the bezel off the chassis (2).
Figure 9-2 Removing the front bezel
To install the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure.
212
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Bezel Blank
Description
Spare part number
Bezel blank, jack black
593230-001
On some models, there is a bezel blank covering the external drive bay that needs to be removed
before installing a drive. To remove a bezel blank:
1.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
2.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 212).
3.
To remove the bezel blank, push the two retaining tabs that hold the bezel blank in place towards
the outer left edge of the bezel (1) and pull the bezel blank inwards to remove it (2).
Figure 9-3 Removing a bezel blank
Bezel Blank
213
System Board Connections
Refer to the following illustration and table to identify the system board connectors.
Figure 9-4 System board connections
214
No.
System Board Connector
System Board Label
Color
Component
1
SATA 3.0
SATA1
light blue
Optical Drive
2
Power
SATA PWR1
white
Optical Drive
3
Mobile PCI Express Module
MXM
black
Graphics Card
4
Hood Sensor
HSENSE
white
Hood Sensor
5
USB
MEDIA
black
SD Media Card Reader
6
PCI Express x1
X1PCIEXP1
black
Expansion Card
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Memory
Description
Spare part number
4-GB, PC3-10600
646801-001
2-GB, PC3-10600
646800-001
1-GB, PC3-10600
646808-001
The computer comes with double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3SDRAM) small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs).
SODIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to two industry-standard
SODIMMs. These memory sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled SODIMM. To achieve
the maximum memory support, you can populate the system board with up to 8-GB of memory.
DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs
CAUTION: This product DOES NOT support DDR3 Ultra Low Voltage (DDR3U) memory. The
processor is not compatible with DDR3U memory and if you plug DDR3U memory into the system
board, it can cause the physical damage to the SODIMM or invoke system malfunction.
For proper system operation, the SODIMMs must be:
●
industry-standard 204-pin
●
unbuffered non-ECC PC3-8500 DDR3-1066 MHz-compliant or PC3-10600 DDR3-1333 MHzcompliant
●
1.5 volt DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs
The DDR3-SDRAM SODIMMs must also:
●
support CAS latency 7 DDR3 1066 MHz (7-7-7 timing) and CAS latency 9 DDR3 1333 MHz
(9-9-9 timing)
●
contain the mandatory Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council (JEDEC) specification
In addition, the computer supports:
●
512-Mbit, 1-Gbit, and 2-Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
●
single-sided and double-sided SODIMMS
●
SODIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 devices; SODIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM are not
supported
NOTE: The system will not operate properly if you install unsupported SODIMMs.
Memory
215
Populating SODIMM Sockets
There are two SODIMM sockets on the system board, with one socket per channel. The sockets are
labeled XMM1 and XMM3. The XMM1 socket operates in memory channel A. The XMM3 socket
operates in memory channel B.
Figure 9-5 SODIMM socket locations
Table 9-1 SODIMM socket locations
Item
Description
System Board Label
Socket Color
1
SODIMM1 socket, Channel B
XMM1
Black
2
SODIMM3 socket, Channel A
XMM3
Black
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the SODIMMs are installed.
216
●
The system will operate in single channel mode if the SODIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
●
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the memory capacity of the
SODIMM in Channel A is equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B.
●
The system will operate in flex mode if the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel A is not
equal to the memory capacity of the SODIMM in Channel B. In flex mode, the channel populated
with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory assigned to dual channel
and the remainder is assigned to single channel. If one channel will have more memory than the
other, the larger amount should be assigned to channel A.
●
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest SODIMM in the
system.
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Installing SODIMMs
CAUTION: You must disconnect the power cord and wait approximately 30 seconds for the power
to drain before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is
always supplied to the memory modules as long as the computer is plugged into an active AC outlet.
Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the
memory modules or system board.
The memory module sockets have gold-plated metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold-plated metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or
oxidation resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object. For more information, refer to Electrostatic Discharge Information on page 62.
When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so may damage
the module.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Locate the memory module sockets on the system board.
WARNING! To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system
components to cool before touching.
4.
To remove a SODIMM, press outward on the two latches on each side of the SODIMM (1) then
pull the SODIMM out of the socket (2).
Figure 9-6 Removing a SODIMM
Memory
217
5.
Slide the new SODIMM into the socket at approximately a 30° angle (1) then press the SODIMM
down (2) so that the latches lock it in place.
Figure 9-7 Installing a SODIMM
NOTE: A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with
the tab on the memory socket.
6.
Replace the access panel.
7.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
8.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
9.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when you turn on the computer.
218
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Front Fan
Description
Spare part number
Front fan
646813-001
The front fan sits against the front on the left side of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Disconnect the fan control cable from the red system board connector labeled CHFAN.
4.
Lift the fan straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-8 Removing the front fan
To install the front fan, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Fan
219
Optical Drive
The Ultra-Slim Desktop uses a slimline Serial ATA (SATA) optical drive.
Description
Spare part number
DVD-ROM drive
608394-001
DVD±RW and CD-RW Super Multi Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe (includes drive
bracket)
595115-001
Blu-ray BD-RW SuperMulti DL Drive with LightScribe
646810-001
Removing the Optical Drive
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of a drive before removing the drive from the
computer.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 212).
4.
Disconnect the cables on the rear of the optical drive (1), push the green release latch on the right
rear side of the drive toward the center of the drive (2), then slide the drive forward and out of the
bay through the front bezel (3).
CAUTION: When removing the cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to
avoid damaging the cable.
Figure 9-9 Removing the optical drive
220
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Preparing the New Optical Drive
Before the new optical drive can be used, the release latch must be attached.
1.
Peel the backing off the adhesive on the release latch.
2.
Without allowing the release latch to touch the optical drive, carefully align the holes on the
release latch with the pins on the side of the optical drive. Make sure the release latch is oriented
properly.
3.
Insert the pin at the front of the optical drive into the hole at the end of the release latch, and press
firmly.
4.
Insert the second pin, and press the entire release latch firmly to fasten the latch securely to the
optical drive.
Figure 9-10 Aligning the release latch
Optical Drive
221
Installing the New Optical Drive
NOTE: If you are installing an optical drive in a bay that did not previously have a drive in it, you
must remove the access panel and the bezel blank covering the opening of the bay before proceeding.
Follow the procedures in Access Panel on page 211 and Bezel Blank on page 213.
1.
Follow the instructions for removing the optical drive. Refer to Removing the Optical Drive
on page 220.
2.
Attach the release latch to the new optical drive. Refer to Preparing the New Optical Drive
on page 221.
3.
With the back of the optical drive facing the computer and the release latch on the inner side of
the drive, align the drive with the opening in the front bezel.
4.
Slide the optical drive through the front bezel all the way into the bay so that it locks in place (1),
then connect the cable to the rear of the drive (2).
Figure 9-11 Installing the optical drive
222
5.
Replace the front bezel and access panel.
6.
If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
8.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Hard Drive
Description
Spare part number
320 GB, 7200 RPM hard drive, Self-Encrypting Drive (SED)
634824-001
320 GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
639135-001
250 GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
608746-001
160 GB, 7200 RPM hard drive
608745-001
160 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
646809-001
80 GB Solid State Drive (SSD)
607817-001
NOTE: The Ultra-Slim Desktop supports only 2.5-inch Serial ATA (SATA) internal hard drives.
Before you remove the old hard drive, be sure to back up the data from the old hard drive so that you
can transfer the data to the new hard drive.
The 2.5-inch hard drive is enclosed in a carrier under the optical drive.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
4.
Press in the release latch on the left side of the hard drive carrier (1) then rotate the carrier handle
to the right (2).
Figure 9-12 Unlocking the hard drive carrier
Hard Drive
223
5.
Lift the hard drive carrier straight up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-13 Removing the hard drive carrier
6.
Remove the four guide screws from the sides of the hard drive carrier.
Figure 9-14 Removing the guide screws
7.
Lift the hard drive up to the top of the carrier (1) and slide the drive out of the carrier (2).
Figure 9-15 Removing the hard drive from the carrier
224
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.
Position the hard drive so that the top of the hard drive is up against the top of the carrier (1) so
that the circuit board on the bottom of the hard drive does not come in contact wit the tabs on the
bottom of the carrier, then slide the new hard drive into the carrier (2).
CAUTION: Do not allow the circuit board on the bottom of the hard drive to scrape along the
tabs on the bottom of the carrier when sliding the hard drive into the carrier. Doing so can cause
irreparable damage to the hard drive.
Figure 9-16 Sliding the hard drive into the carrier
9.
Set the hard drive down into the bottom of the carrier (1), then replace the four guide screws on
the sides of the carrier to secure the drive in the carrier (2).
Figure 9-17 Lowering the hard drive and replacing the guide screws
Hard Drive
225
10. To place the hard drive carrier back in the chassis, align the guide screws with the slots on the
drive bay, drop the carrier straight down into the drive bay (1), and press the handle on the
carrier all the way down (2) so that the drive is properly seated and locked in place.
Figure 9-18 Installing the hard drive carrier
11. Replace the optical drive and reconnect the cable on the back of the optical drive.
12. Replace the computer access panel.
13. If the computer was on a stand, replace the stand.
14. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the computer.
15. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
NOTE: No configuration of the SATA hard drive is necessary; the computer automatically
recognizes it the next time you turn on the computer.
226
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Optical Drive Rail
Description
Spare part number
Optical drive rail and cable kit
594219-001
The optical drive rail sits behind the USB ports on the front of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
4.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 223).
5.
Remove the two Torx screws that secure the rail to the chassis (1), lift the tab (2) on the rail, slide
the rail toward the rear of the unit (3), and then pull the rail up and out of the chassis.
Figure 9-19 Removing the optical drive rail
To install the optical drive rail, reverse the removal procedures.
Optical Drive Rail
227
Card Reader
Description
Spare part number
Card reader
593235-001
The card reader is secured to the front right corner of the chassis.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 212).
4.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
5.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 223).
6.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
7.
Disconnect the cable from the system board connector labeled MEDIA.
8.
On the outside of the chassis, remove the one Torx screw that secures the card reader to the
chassis.
Figure 9-20 Removing the card reader screw
228
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
9.
Pull the reader away from the front of the chassis while threading the cable through the slot in the
front of the chassis.
Figure 9-21 Removing the card reader
To install the card reader, reverse the removal procedure.
Card Reader
229
Speaker
Description
Spare part number
Speaker
647447-001
The speaker is secured to the front of the chassis between the fan and the I/O ports.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the front bezel (Front Bezel on page 212).
4.
Disconnect the speaker cable from the white system board connector labeled SPKR.
5.
On the outside of the chassis, remove the two Torx T8 screws that secure the speaker to the
chassis (1), and then from the inside of the chassis, slide the speaker up to remove it (2).
Figure 9-22 Removing the speaker
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedure.
230
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Heat sink
Description
Spare part number
Heat sink
587456-001
The heat sink is secured by four Torx screws. It does not have an attached fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Lift the front fan up and place it on top of the optical drive to access the front bezel release tabs.
You do not need to disconnect the fan cable from the system board.
4.
Loosen the four Torx screws that secure the heat sink to the system board, and then lift the heat
sink from the system board.
Figure 9-23 Loosening the heat sink screws
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an
X) to even the downward forces on the processor to avoid damage that could require replacing
the system board.
Heat sink
231
5.
Lift the heat sink from the system board.
Figure 9-24 Removing the heat sink
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an
X) to even the downward forces on the processor to avoid damage that could require replacing
the system board.
6.
Lay the heat sink on its top in a safe area to prevent the thermal grease from contaminating the
work surface.
If reusing the existing heat sink go to step 1.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 3.
1.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean bottom of the heat sink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
2.
Position the heat sink atop the processor.
3.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
4.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
232
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Processor
Description
Spare part number
Intel Core i7 processors
2600S, 2.8 GHz, 8-MB L3 cache, 95W
638419-001
Intel Core i5 processors
2500S, 2.7 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
638420-001
2400S, 2.7 GHz, 6-MB L3 cache, 95W
640953-001
Intel Core i3 processors
2120, 3.3 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638629-001
2100, 3.1 GHz, 3-MB L3 cache, 65W
638628-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
4.
Rotate the processor locking lever to its full open position (1).
5.
Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position (2).
Processor
233
6.
Carefully lift the processor from the socket (3).
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and
handling them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to
replace the system board.
The heat sink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage to
the processor’s solder connections.
Figure 9-25 Removing the processor
To install a new processor:
1.
234
Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
2.
Secure the locking lever.
Figure 9-26 Replacing the processor
If reusing the existing heat sink, go to step 3.
If using a new heat sink, go to step 5.
3.
If reusing the existing heat sink, clean bottom of the heat sink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
4.
Position the heat sink atop the processor.
5.
If using a new heat sink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heat sink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6.
Secure the heat sink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws.
CAUTION: Heat sink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in
an X) to evenly seat the heat sink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the
socket are very fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
NOTE: After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to
ensure that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Processor
235
TV Tuner or WLAN Module
The procedure to remove and replace the TV tuner module and the WLAN module are similar. The
image in this section illustrates a TV tuner module. Use the same basic procedure the remove a WLAN
module.
Description
Spare part number
HP TV Tuner Kit (includes hardware)
613990-001
802.11a/b/g/n WLAN module
631954-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
4.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 223).
5.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
6.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
7.
Disconnect the antenna cable from the connector on the module (1).
8.
Remove the two screws (2) that secure the module to the system board.
Figure 9-27 Removing the TV tuner module
9.
236
Lift the module to a 45 degree angle, and then remove the module from the connector by pulling it
away at an angle.
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
To install the TV tuner module or WLAN module, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the
antenna cable is correctly routed.
Hood Sensor
Description
Spare part number
Hood sensor
638816-001
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
4.
Unplug the hood sensor cable from the white system board connector labeled HSENSE (1) and
remove the cable from the white clip mounted on the inside chassis wall.
5.
Slide the hood sensor into the chassis to remove it from its slot (2). Disengaging the hood sensor
from the chassis may require use of a screwdriver or similar tool.
Figure 9-28 Removing the hood sensor
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedures.
Hood Sensor
237
System Board
Description
Spare part number
System board, includes Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
611836-001
System board, does not include Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
649743-001
Front I/O panel
587458-001
CAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the memory modules (Memory on page 215).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 219).
5.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
6.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 223).
7.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
8.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
9.
Disconnect the rear fan cable from the system board.
10. Disconnect any remaining cables connected to the system board, noting their location for
reinstallation.
11. Remove the front I/O panel:
a.
Remove the screw from the right side of the panel that secures it to the front of the chassis.
Figure 9-29 I/O panel screw
238
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
b.
Press the tab on right side of the panel (1), and then swing the right side of the cage away
from the chassis to remove it (2).
Figure 9-30 Removing the I/O panel
12. Remove the three remaining screws (1) that secure the system board to the chassis.
13. Slide system board toward the front of the unit until the rear connectors are clear of their slots in
the chassis (2).
14. Lift the rear of the system board until it clears the chassis, and then remove the system board from
the chassis (3).
Figure 9-31 Removing the system board
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
System Board
239
NOTE: When replacing the system board, you must also change the chassis serial number in the
BIOS.
Rear Fan
Description
Spare part number
Rear fan
605155-001
The rear fan is secured to the rear right corner of the chassis. You must remove the system board before
you can remove the rear fan.
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Remove the computer access panel (Access Panel on page 211).
3.
Remove the optical drive (Removing the Optical Drive on page 220).
4.
Remove the front fan (Front Fan on page 219).
5.
Remove the hard drive (Hard Drive on page 223).
6.
Remove the optical drive rail (Optical Drive Rail on page 227).
7.
Remove the heat sink (Heat sink on page 231).
8.
Remove the system board (System Board on page 238).
9.
From the outside of the chassis, remove the four Phillips screws that secure the fan to the chassis.
Figure 9-32 Removing the rear fan screws
240
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
10. From the inside of the chassis, slide the fan out from underneath the chassis lip, and then remove
the fan.
Figure 9-33 Removing the rear fan
To install the rear fan, reverse the removal procedure.
Rear Fan
241
Changing from Desktop to Tower Configuration
1.
Prepare the computer for disassembly (Preparation for Disassembly on page 210).
2.
Orient the computer so that its left side is facing down and place the computer firmly down into
the stand.
Figure 9-34 Placing the computer on the stand
3.
Reconnect the external equipment, plug the power cord into a power outlet, and turn the computer
on.
4.
Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer cover or access panel was
removed.
To change from the tower configuration to the desktop configuration, reverse the previous steps.
NOTE: An optional Quick Release mounting bracket is available from HP for mounting the computer
to a wall, desk, or swing arm.
242
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Port Cover
Description
Spare part number
Port cover
646818-001
An optional rear port cover is available for the computer.
To install the port cover:
1.
Thread the cables through the bottom hole on the port cover (1) and connect the cables to the rear
ports on the computer.
2.
Insert the hooks on the port cover into the slots on the rear of the chassis, then slide the cover to
the right to secure it in place (2).
Figure 9-35 Installing a port cover
NOTE: For security purposes, you can install an optional cable lock to the chassis that locks the port
cover and secures the computer.
The port cover is secured in place by a retention lever just inside the port cover opening. To remove the
port cover, pull the lever back towards the port cover opening (1), then slide the cover to the left and
off the computer (2).
Port Cover
243
Figure 9-36 Removing a port cover
Power Supply, External
The USDT chassis uses an external power supply.
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the power supply provided with the computer, a
replacement power supply provided by HP, or a power supply purchased as an accessory from HP
should be used with the computer.
244
Chapter 9 Removal and Replacement Procedures – Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
A
Battery Replacement
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock. When replacing the
battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery originally installed in the computer. The computer comes
with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
WARNING! The computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of
fire and burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60°C (140ºF).
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings.
When the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment. Before
beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching a
grounded metal object.
NOTE: The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC
wall socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and
rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/
recycle.
1.
Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer.
2.
Remove all removable media, such as compact discs or USB flash drives, from the computer.
3.
Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external devices.
4.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as
long as the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord to
avoid damage to the internal components of the computer.
5.
Remove the computer access panel.
6.
Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
245
NOTE: On some computer models, it may be necessary to remove an internal component to
gain access to the battery.
7.
Depending on the type of battery holder on the system board, complete the following instructions
to replace the battery.
Type 1
a.
Lift the battery out of its holder.
Figure A-1 Removing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 1)
b.
Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up. The battery holder automatically
secures the battery in the proper position.
Type 2
a.
To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out (1).
b.
To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other edge
of the battery (2).
Figure A-2 Removing and Replacing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 2)
Type 3
a.
246
Pull back on the clip (1) that is holding the battery in place, and remove the battery (2).
Appendix A Battery Replacement
b.
Insert the new battery and position the clip back into place.
Figure A-3 Removing a Coin Cell Battery (Type 3)
NOTE: After the battery has been replaced, use the following steps to complete this procedure.
8.
Replace the computer access panel.
9.
Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
10. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups using Computer Setup.
11. Lock any security devices that were disengaged when the computer access panel was removed.
247
B
Power Cord Set Requirements
The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature
on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240 volts AC.
Power supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are equipped with
internal switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage.
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where you
purchased the equipment.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the
computer.
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
1.
The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation
in the country where the power cord set will be installed.
2.
The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a nominal
voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.
3.
The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the cord
must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed
upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point
where the cord exits from the product.
WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is
damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.
Japanese Power Cord Requirements
For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.
CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.
248
Appendix B Power Cord Set Requirements
Country-Specific Requirements
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.
Country
Accrediting Agency
Country
Accrediting Agency
Australia (1)
EANSW
Italy (1)
IMQ
Austria (1)
OVE
Japan (3)
METI
Belgium (1)
CEBC
Norway (1)
NEMKO
Canada (2)
CSA
Sweden (1)
SEMKO
Denmark (1)
DEMKO
Switzerland (1)
SEV
Finland (1)
SETI
United Kingdom (1)
BSI
France (1)
UTE
United States (2)
UL
Germany (1)
VDE
1.
The flexible cord must be Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance
coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it
will be used.
2.
The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole
grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15A, 250V) configuration.
3.
Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark and registration number in accordance with the
Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug must
be a two-pole grounding type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.
Country-Specific Requirements
249
C
POST Error Messages
This appendix lists the error codes, error messages, and the various indicator light and audible
sequences that you may encounter during Power-On Self-Test (POST) or computer restart, the probable
source of the problem, and steps you can take to resolve the error condition.
POST Message Disabled suppresses most system messages during POST, such as memory count and
non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs, the screen will display the error message. To manually
switch to the POST Messages Enabled mode during POST, press any key (except F10, F11, or F12).
The default mode is POST Message Disabled.
The speed at which the computer loads the operating system and the extent to which it is tested are
determined by the POST mode selection.
Quick Boot is a fast startup process that does not run all of the system level tests, such as the memory
test. Full Boot runs all of the ROM-based system tests and takes longer to complete.
Full Boot may also be enabled to run every 1 to 30 days on a regularly scheduled basis. To establish
the schedule, reconfigure the computer to the Full Boot Every x Days mode, using Computer Setup.
NOTE: For more information on Computer Setup, see Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 4.
250
Appendix C POST Error Messages
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
This section covers those POST errors that have numeric codes associated with them. The section also
includes some text messages that may be encountered during POST.
NOTE: The computer will beep once after a POST text message is displayed on the screen.
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
101-Option ROM Checksum Error
System ROM or expansion board option
ROM checksum.
1.
Verify the correct ROM.
2.
Flash the ROM if needed.
3.
If an expansion board was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
4.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
5.
If the message disappears, there may
be a problem with the expansion card.
6.
Replace the system board.
1.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
2.
Remove expansion boards.
3.
Replace the system board.
1.
If a PCI expansion card was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
2.
In Computer Setup, set Advanced >
Device Options > NIC PXE Option
ROM Download to DISABLE to
prevent PXE option ROM for the internal
NIC from being downloaded during
POST to free more memory for an
expansion card's option ROM. Internal
PXE option ROM is used for booting
from the NIC to a PXE server.
103-System Board Failure
110-Out of Memory Space for Option ROMs
DMA or timers.
Recently added PCI expansion card contains
an option ROM too large to download
during POST.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
251
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
162-System Options Not Set
Configuration incorrect.
Run Computer Setup and check the
configuration in Advanced > Onboard
Devices.
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to
be replaced.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel. If the problem persists, replace the
RTC battery. See the Removal and
Replacement section for instructions on
installing a new battery, or contact an
authorized dealer or reseller for RTC battery
replacement.
163-Time & Date Not Set
Invalid time or date in configuration memory.
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to
be replaced.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel (Computer Setup can also be used). If
the problem persists, replace the RTC
battery. See the Removal and Replacement
section for instructions on installing a new
battery, or contact an authorized dealer or
reseller for RTC battery replacement.
163-Time & Date Not Set
CMOS jumper may not be properly installed.
Check for proper placement of the CMOS
jumper if applicable.
164-MemorySize Error
Memory amount has changed since the last
boot (memory added or removed).
Press the F1 key to save the memory
changes.
164-MemorySize Error
Memory configuration incorrect.
1.
Run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
2.
Make sure the memory module(s) are
installed properly.
3.
If third-party memory has been added,
test using HP-only memory.
4.
Verify proper memory module type.
1.
Ensure memory modules are correctly
installed.
2.
Verify proper memory module type.
3.
Remove and replace the identified
faulty memory module(s).
4.
If the error persists after replacing
memory modules, replace the system
board.
A memory module in memory socket
identified in the error message is missing
critical SPD information, or is incompatible
with the chipset.
1.
Verify proper memory module type.
2.
Try another memory socket.
3.
Replace DIMM with a module
conforming to the SPD standard.
Populated DIMM Configuration is not
optimized.
Rearrange the DIMMs so that each channel
has the same amount of memory.
201-Memory Error
213-Incompatible Memory Module in
Memory Socket(s) X, X, ...
214-DIMM Configuration Warning
252
RAM failure.
Appendix C POST Error Messages
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
219-ECC Memory Module Detected ECC
Modules not supported on this Platform
Recently added memory module(s) support
ECC memory error correction.
1.
If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
2.
Check product documentation for
memory support information.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4.
Replace keyboard.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Replace the system board.
1.
Reconnect the keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
3.
Replace the keyboard.
4.
Replace the system board.
1.
Reseat the graphics card (if applicable).
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
3.
Verify monitor is attached and turned
on.
4.
Replace the graphics card (if possible).
301-Keyboard Error
303-Keyboard Controller Error
304-Keyboard or System Unit Error
501-Display Adapter Failure
Keyboard failure.
I/O board keyboard controller.
Keyboard failure.
Graphics display controller.
510-Flash Screen Image Corrupted
Flash Screen image has errors.
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS
image.
511-CPU, CPUA, or CPUB Fan not Detected
CPU fan is not connected or may have
malfunctioned.
1.
Reseat CPU fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace CPU fan.
1.
Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
512-Chassis, Rear Chassis, or Front Chassis
Fan not Detected
Chassis, rear chassis, or front chassis fan is
not connected or may have malfunctioned.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
253
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
513-Front Chassis fan not detected
Front chassis fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
1.
Reseat front chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace front chassis fan.
1.
Reseat CPU or chassis fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace CPU or chassis fan.
1.
Reseat power supply fan.
2.
Reseat fan cable.
3.
Replace power supply fan.
1.
Check and/or replace cables.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
3.
Replace diskette drive.
4.
Replace the system board.
1.
Disconnect any other diskette controller
devices (tape drives).
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
514-CPU or Chassis Fan not Detected
515-Power Supply fan not detected
601-Diskette Controller Error
605-Diskette Drive Type Error
CPU or chassis fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
Power supply fan is not connected or may
have malfunctioned.
Diskette controller circuitry or floppy drive
circuitry incorrect.
Mismatch in drive type.
660-Display cache is detected unreliable
Integrated graphics controller display cache
is not working properly and will be disabled.
Replace system board if minimal graphics
degrading is an issue.
912-Computer Cover Has Been Removed
Since Last System Startup
Computer cover was removed since last
system startup.
No action required.
917-Front Audio Not Connected
Front audio harness has been detached or
unseated from motherboard.
Reconnect or replace front audio harness.
918-Front USB Not Connected
Front USB harness has been detached or
unseated from motherboard.
Reconnect or replace front USB harness.
921-Device in PCI Express slot failed to
initialize
There is an incompatibility/problem with this
device and the system or PCI Express Link
could not be retrained to an x1.
Try rebooting the system. If the error
reoccurs, the device may not work with this
system
1151-Serial Port A Address Conflict Detected
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to COM1.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
254
Appendix C POST Error Messages
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
1152-Serial Port B Address Conflict Detected
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to COM2.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1.
Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2.
Clear CMOS. (See Appendix B,
Password Security and Resetting CMOS
on page 307.)
3.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1.
Determine if hard drive is giving correct
error message. Enter Computer Setup
and run the Drive Protection System test
under Storage > DPS Self-test.
2.
Apply hard drive firmware patch
if applicable. (Available at
http://www.hp.com/support.)
3.
Back up contents and replace hard
drive.
1155-Serial Port Address Conflict Detected
1720-SMART Hard Drive Detects Imminent
Failure
Both external and internal serial ports are
assigned to same IRQ.
Hard drive is about to fail. (Some hard
drives have a hard drive firmware patch that
will fix an erroneous error message.)
1796-SATA Cabling Error
One or more SATA devices are improperly
attached. For optimal performance, the
SATA 0 and SATA 1 connectors must be
used before SATA 2 and SATA 3.
Ensure SATA connectors are used in
ascending order. For one device, use SATA
0. For two devices, use SATA 0 and SATA
1. For three devices, use SATA 0, SATA 1,
and SATA 2.
1797-SATA Drivelock is not supported in
RAID mode.
Drivelock is enabled on one or more SATA
hard drives, and they cannot be accessed
while the system is configured for RAID
mode.
Either remove the Drivelocked SATA device
or disable the Drivelock feature. To disable
the Drivelock feature, enter Computer Setup,
change Storage > Storage Options >
SATA Emulation to IDE, and select File >
Save Changes and Exit. Reenter
Computer Setup and select Security >
Drivelock Security. For each listed
Drivelock-capable SATA device, ensure
Drivelock is Disabled. Lastly, change
Storage > Storage Options > SATA
Emulation back to RAID and select File >
Save Changes and Exit.
1801-Microcode Patch Error
Processor is not supported by ROM BIOS.
1.
Upgrade BIOS to proper version.
2.
Change the processor.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
255
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2200-PMM Allocation Error during MEBx
Download
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the computer,
restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3.
If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the computer.
4.
If the error persists, replace the system
board.
2201-MEBx Module did not checksum
correctly
2202-PMM Deallocation Error during MEBx
cleanup
2203-Setup error during MEBx execution
256
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
Memory error during POST execution of the
Management Engine (ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM.
MEBx selection or exit resulted in a setup
failure.
Appendix C POST Error Messages
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2204-Inventory error during MEBx execution
BIOS information passed to the MEBx
resulted in a failure.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
2205-Interface error during MEBx execution
MEBx operation experienced a hardware
error during communication with ME.
2211-Memory not configured correctly for
proper MEBx execution.
DIMM1 or XMM1 is not installed.
Make sure there is a memory module in the
black DIMM1 socket and that it is properly
seated.
2212-USB Key Provisioning failure writing to
device
USB device used for USB key provisioning
will not allow BIOS to update provision file
properly.
1.
Try a different USB key device for
provisioning.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Update to the latest ME firmware
version.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Recreate the provisioning file using third
party management console software.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
Otherwise, update the ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
2217-ME Firmware Version request failure
2218-ME Firmware Version should be
updated
2219-USB Key Provisioning file has invalid
header identifier
ME firmware is not properly responding to
BIOS query for version information.
ME firmware must be updated to match
current functionality contained in the system
BIOS.
Provisioning file contained on the USB key
has been corrupted or is not a valid version
for the current ME firmware.
POST Numeric Codes and Text Messages
257
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
2220-USB Key Provisioning file has
mismatch version
Provisioning file contained on the USB key is
not a valid version for the current ME
firmware.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists and system BIOS
has been recently updated, restore
previous system BIOS version.
Otherwise, update the ME firmware
version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Error occurred during MEBx execution which
fails into the “General” grouping. Status
information displayed along with the error
provides further clarity into the failure. MEBx
handles transference of information between
the system BIOS and ME firmware.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Error occurred during MEBx execution which
fails into “ME” grouping.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Special system configurations with reduced
ME firmware image require BIOS control of
ME firmware upgrading. A failure has
occurred after the ME firmware update
process in which the BIOS could not relock
the ME firmware region.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Special system configurations with reduced
ME firmware image require BIOS control of
ME firmware upgrading. A failure has
occurred prior to the ME firmware update
process in which the BIOS could not unlock
the ME firmware region.
1.
Reboot the computer.
2.
If the error persists, update to the latest
BIOS version and ME firmware version.
3.
If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
2230-General error during MEBx execution
2231-ME error during MEBx execution
2232-AMT error during MEBx execution
2233-HECI error during MEBx execution
2239-ME image lock failure
2240-ME image unlock failure
258
Error occurred during MEBx execution which
fails into “AMT” grouping.
Error occurred during MEBx execution which
fails into “MEI or HECI” grouping.
Appendix C POST Error Messages
Table C-1 Numeric Codes and Text Messages (continued)
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Invalid Electronic Serial Number
Electronic serial number is missing.
Enter the correct serial number in Computer
Setup.
Network Server Mode Active and No
Keyboard Attached
Keyboard failure while Network Server
Mode enabled.
1.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4.
Replace keyboard.
Parity Check 2
Parity RAM failure.
Run Computer Setup and Diagnostic utilities.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and
Audible Codes
This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before or
during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool
before touching.
NOTE: If you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of the
computer and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.
Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be performed.
Not all diagnostic lights and audible codes are available on all models.
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Green Power LED On.
None
Computer on.
None
Green Power LED flashes every
two seconds.
None
Computer in Suspend to
RAM mode (some models
only) or normal Suspend
mode.
None required. Press any key or move the mouse
to wake the computer.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
259
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes two
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
2
Processor thermal
protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not
blocked and the processor cooling fan is
running.
2.
Open hood, press power button, and see if
the processor fan spins. If the processor fan
is not spinning, make sure the fan's cable is
plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then
replace heat sink/fan assembly.
4.
Contact an authorized reseller or service
provider.
Processor not installed (not
an indicator of bad
processor).
1.
Check to see that the processor is present.
2.
Reseat the processor.
Power failure (power
supply is overloaded).
1.
Open the hood and ensure the 4 or 6-wire
power supply cable is seated into the
connector on the system board.
2.
Check if a device is causing the problem by
removing ALL attached devices (such as
hard, diskette, or optical drives, and
expansion cards). Power on the system. If
the system enters the POST, then power off
and replace one device at a time and repeat
this procedure until failure occurs. Replace
the device that is causing the failure.
Continue adding devices one at a time to
ensure all devices are functioning properly.
3.
Replace the power supply.
4.
Replace the system board.
A fan may be blocked or
not turning.
OR
The heat sink/fan
assembly is not properly
attached to the processor.
Red Power LED flashes three
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
3
Red Power LED flashes four
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
4
OR
The incorrect external
power supply adapter is
being used on the USDT.
OR
The USDT power supply adapter must be at
135W and use the Smart ID technology before
the system will power up. Replace the power
supply adapter with the HP-supplied USDT power
supply adapter.
260
Appendix C POST Error Messages
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
5
Pre-video memory error.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or
the system board, you must unplug the computer
power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or
remove a DIMM module.
Red Power LED flashes six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
6
Pre-video graphics error.
1.
Reseat DIMMs.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the
faulty module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP
memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the
system board.
Red Power LED flashes seven
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
7
System board failure
(ROM detected failure
prior to video).
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED flashes eight
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
8
Invalid ROM based on
bad checksum.
1.
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS
image. See the “Boot Block Emergency
Recovery Mode” section of the Desktop
Management Guide for more information.
2.
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED flashes nine
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
9
1.
Check that the voltage selector, located on
the rear of the power supply (some models),
is set to the appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage setting depends on your region.
2.
Unplug the AC power cord from the
computer, wait 30 seconds, then plug the
power cord back in to the computer.
3.
Replace the system board.
4.
Replace the processor.
System powers on but is
unable to boot.
Interpreting POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
261
Table C-2 Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (continued)
Activity
Beeps
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED flashes ten
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
10
Bad option card.
1.
Check each option card by removing the
card (one at a time if multiple cards), then
power on the system to see if fault goes
away.
2.
Once a bad card is identified, remove and
replace the bad option card.
3.
Replace the system board.
1.
Install a TXT capable processor.
2.
Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10)
utility.
3.
Reinstall the original processor.
Red Power LED flashes eleven
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause. Beeps stop after fifth
iteration but LEDs continue until
problem is solved.
11
System does not power on and
LEDs are not flashing.
None
The current processor does
not support a feature
previously enabled on this
system.
System unable to power
on.
Press and hold the power button for less than 4
seconds. If the hard drive LED turns green, the
power button is working correctly. Try the
following:
1.
Check that the voltage selector (some
models), located on the rear of the power
supply, is set to the appropriate voltage.
Proper voltage setting depends on your
region.
2.
Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less than 4
seconds. If the hard drive LED does not turn on
green then:
262
Appendix C POST Error Messages
1.
Check that the unit is plugged into a working
AC outlet.
2.
Open hood and check that the power button
harness is properly connected to the system
board.
3.
Check that both power supply cables are
properly connected to the system board.
4.
Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the
system board is turned on. If it is turned on,
then replace the power button harness. If the
problem persists, replace the system board.
5.
If the 5V_aux light on the system board is
not turned on, remove the expansion cards
one at a time until the 5V_aux light on the
system board turns on. It the problem
persists, replace the power supply.
D
Troubleshooting Without
Diagnostics
This chapter provides information on how to identify and correct minor problems, such as diskette drive,
hard drive, optical drive, graphics, audio, memory, and software problems. If you encounter problems
with the computer, refer to the tables in this chapter for probable causes and recommended solutions.
NOTE: For information on specific error messages that may appear on the screen during Power-On
Self-Test (POST) at startup, refer to Appendix A, POST Error Messages on page 250.
Safety and Comfort
WARNING! Misuse of the computer or failure to establish a safe and comfortable work environment
may result in discomfort or serious injury. Refer to the Safety & Comfort Guide at http://www.hp.com/
ergo for more information on choosing a workspace and creating a safe and comfortable work
environment. For more information, refer to the Safety & Regulatory Information guide.
Before You Call for Technical Support
If you are having problems with the computer, try the appropriate solutions below to try to isolate the
exact problem before calling for technical support.
●
Run the HP diagnostic tool.
●
Run the hard drive self-test in Computer Setup. Refer to Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 4 for
more information.
●
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights are
error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to Appendix A, POST Error Messages
on page 250 for more information.
●
If the screen is blank, plug the monitor into a different video port on the computer if one is
available. Or, replace the monitor with a monitor that you know is functioning properly.
●
If you are working on a network, plug another computer with a different cable into the network
connection. There may be a problem with the network plug or cable.
●
If you recently added new hardware, remove the hardware and see if the computer functions
properly.
●
If you recently installed new software, uninstall the software and see if the computer functions
properly.
Safety and Comfort
263
●
Boot the computer to the Safe Mode to see if it will boot without all of the drivers loaded. When
booting the operating system, use “Last Known Configuration.”
●
Refer to the comprehensive online technical support at http://www.hp.com/support.
●
Refer to Helpful Hints on page 264 in this guide.
To assist you in resolving problems online, HP Instant Support Professional Edition provides you with
self-solve diagnostics. If you need to contact HP support, use HP Instant Support Professional Edition's
online chat feature. Access HP Instant Support Professional Edition at: http://www.hp.com/go/ispe.
Access the Business Support Center (BSC) at http://www.hp.com/go/bizsupport for the latest online
support information, software and drivers, proactive notification, and worldwide community of peers
and HP experts.
If it becomes necessary to call for technical assistance, be prepared to do the following to ensure that
your service call is handled properly:
●
Be in front of your computer when you call.
●
Write down the computer serial number, product ID number, and monitor serial number before
calling.
●
Spend time troubleshooting the problem with the service technician.
●
Remove any hardware that was recently added to your system.
●
Remove any software that was recently installed.
●
Restore the system from the Recovery Disc Set that you created or restore the system to its original
factory condition in HP Backup and Recovery Manager.
CAUTION: Restoring the system will erase all data on the hard drive. Be sure to back up all data
files before running the restore process.
NOTE: For sales information and warranty upgrades (Care Packs), call your local authorized service
provider or dealer.
Helpful Hints
If you encounter problems with the computer, monitor, or software, see the following list of general
suggestions before taking further action:
264
●
Check that the computer and monitor are plugged into a working electrical outlet.
●
Check that the voltage select switch (some models) is set to the appropriate voltage for your region
(115V or 230V).
●
Check that the computer is turned on and the green power light is on.
●
Check that the monitor is turned on and the green monitor light is on.
●
Check the Power LED on the front of the computer to see if it is flashing red. The flashing lights are
error codes that will help you diagnose the problem. Refer to Appendix A, POST Error Messages
on page 250 for more information.
●
Turn up the brightness and contrast controls of the monitor if the monitor is dim.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
●
Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard should be operating correctly.
●
Check all cable connections for loose connections or incorrect connections.
●
Wake the computer by pressing any key on the keyboard or pressing the power button. If the
system remains in suspend mode, shut down the computer by pressing and holding the power
button for at least four seconds then press the power button again to restart the computer. If the
system will not shut down, unplug the power cord, wait a few seconds, then plug it in again. The
computer will restart if it is set to power on automatically as soon as power is restored in
Computer Setup. If it does not restart, press the power button to start the computer.
●
Reconfigure the computer after installing a non-plug and play expansion board or other option.
See Solving Hardware Installation Problems on page 290 for instructions.
●
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed. For example, if you are using a
printer, you need a driver for that model printer.
●
Remove all bootable media (diskette, CD, or USB device) from the system before turning it on.
●
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system, check
to be sure that it is supported on the system.
●
If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged into
the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot, the other
monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the monitor will
not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in Computer Setup.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, there is always voltage
applied to the system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before
opening the computer to prevent system board or component damage.
Helpful Hints
265
Solving General Problems
You may be able to easily resolve the general problems described in this section. If a problem persists
and you are unable to resolve it yourself or if you feel uncomfortable about performing the operation,
contact an authorized dealer or reseller.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool
before touching.
Table D-1 Solving General Problems
Computer appears locked up and will not turn off when the power button is pressed.
Cause
Solution
Software control of the power switch is not functional.
1.
Press and hold the power button for at least four seconds
until the computer turns off.
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Computer will not respond to USB keyboard or mouse.
Cause
Solution
Computer is in standby mode.
To resume from standby mode, press the power button or
press any key.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby
mode, do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will
lose any unsaved data.
System has locked up.
Restart computer.
Computer date and time display is incorrect.
Cause
Solution
RTC (real-time clock) battery may need to be replaced.
First, reset the date and time under Control Panel
(Computer Setup can also be used to update the RTC date
and time). If the problem persists, replace the RTC battery. See
the Removal and Replacement section for instructions on
installing a new battery, or contact an authorized dealer or
reseller for RTC battery replacement.
NOTE: Connecting the computer to a live AC outlet
prolongs the life of the RTC battery.
266
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.
Cause
Solution
The Num Lock key may be on.
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light should not be on
if you want to use the arrow keys. The Num Lock key can be
disabled (or enabled) in Computer Setup.
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.
Cause
Solution
System volume may be set low or muted.
1.
Check the F10 BIOS settings to make sure the internal
system speaker is not muted (this setting does not affect
the external speakers).
2.
Make sure the external speakers are properly connected
and powered on and that the speakers' volume control is
set correctly.
3.
Use the system volume control available in the operating
system to make sure the speakers are not muted or to
increase the volume.
Cannot remove computer cover or access panel.
Cause
Solution
Smart Cover Lock, featured on some computers, is locked.
Unlock the Smart Cover Lock using Computer Setup.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key, a device for manually
disabling the Smart Cover Lock, is available from HP. You will
need the FailSafe Key in case of forgotten password, power
loss, or computer malfunction. Order PN 166527-001 for the
wrench-style key or PN 166527-002 for the screwdriver bit
key.
Poor performance is experienced.
Cause
Solution
Processor is hot.
1.
Make sure airflow to the computer is not blocked. Leave
a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all vented sides of the
computer and above the monitor to permit the required
airflow.
2.
Make sure fans are connected and working properly
(some fans only operate when needed).
3.
Make sure the processor heat sink is installed properly.
Hard drive is full.
Transfer data from the hard drive to create more space on the
hard drive.
Low on memory.
Add more memory.
Solving General Problems
267
Table D-1 Solving General Problems (continued)
Poor performance is experienced.
Cause
Solution
Hard drive fragmented.
Defragment hard drive.
Program previously accessed did not release reserved memory
back to the system.
Restart the computer.
Virus resident on the hard drive.
Run virus protection program.
Too many applications running.
1.
Close unnecessary applications to free up memory.
2.
Add more memory. Some applications run in the
background and can be closed by right-clicking on their
corresponding icons in the task tray. To prevent these
applications from launching at startup, go to Start >
Run (Windows XP) or Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Run (Windows Vista and Windows 7)
and type msconfig. On the Startup tab of the System
Configuration Utility, clear applications that you do not
want to launch automatically.
1.
Lower the display resolution for the current application or
consult the documentation that came with the application
for suggestions on how to improve performance by
adjusting parameters in the application.
2.
Add more memory.
3.
Upgrade the graphics solution.
Some software applications, especially games, are stressful on
the graphics subsystem
Cause unknown.
Restart the computer.
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second,
followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but
LEDs continue flashing).
Cause
Solution
Processor thermal protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and
the processor cooling fan is running.
2.
Open hood, press power button, and see if the processor
fan spins. If the processor fan is not spinning, make sure
the fan's cable is plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then replace the
heat sink/fan assembly.
4.
Contact an authorized reseller or service provider.
A fan may be blocked or not turning.
OR
The heat sink is not properly attached to the processor.
268
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
System does not power on and the LEDs on the front of the computer are not flashing.
Cause
Solution
System unable to power on.
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If the
hard drive LED turns green, then:
1.
Check that the voltage selector, located on the rear of
the power supply on some models, is set to the
appropriate voltage. Proper voltage setting depends on
your region.
2.
Remove the expansion cards one at a time until the
5V_aux light on the system board turns on.
3.
Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less than 4 seconds. If the
hard drive LED does not turn on green then:
1.
Check that the unit is plugged into a working AC outlet.
2.
Open hood and check that the power button harness is
properly connected to the system board.
3.
Check that both power supply cables are properly
connected to the system board.
4.
Check to see if the 5V_aux light on the system board is
turned on. If it is turned on, then replace the power
button harness.
5.
If the 5V_aux light on the system board is off, then
replace the power supply.
6.
Replace the system board.
Solving General Problems
269
Solving Power Problems
Common causes and solutions for power problems are listed in the following table.
Table D-2 Solving Power Problems
Power supply shuts down intermittently.
Cause
Solution
Voltage selector switch on rear of computer chassis (some
models) not switched to correct line voltage (115V or 230V).
Select the proper AC voltage using the selector switch.
Power supply will not turn on because of internal power
supply fault.
Contact an authorized service provider to replace the power
supply.
Computer powered off automatically and the Power LED flashes Red two times, once every second,
followed by a two second pause, and the computer beeps two times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but
LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Processor thermal protection activated:
1.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not blocked and
the processor cooling fan is running.
2.
Open hood, press power button, and see if the processor
fan spins. If the processor fan is not spinning, make sure
the fan's cable is plugged onto the system board header.
3.
If fan is plugged in, but is not spinning, then replace the
heat sink/fan assembly.
4.
Contact an authorized reseller or service provider.
A fan may be blocked or not turning.
OR
The heat sink is not properly attached to the processor.
270
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Power LED flashes Red four times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the
computer beeps four times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Power failure (power supply is overloaded).
1.
Check that the voltage selector, located on the rear of
the power supply (some models), is set to the appropriate
voltage. Proper voltage setting depends on your region.
2.
Open the hood and ensure the 4- or 6-wire power supply
cable is seated into the connector on the system board.
3.
Check if a device is causing the problem by removing
ALL attached devices (such as hard, diskette, or optical
drives, and expansion cards). Power on the system. If the
system enters the POST, then power off and replace one
device at a time and repeat this procedure until failure
occurs. Replace the device that is causing the failure.
Continue adding devices one at a time to ensure all
devices are functioning properly.
4.
Replace the power supply.
5.
Replace the system board.
The incorrect external power supply adapter is being used on
the USDT.
The USDT power supply adapter must be at 135W and use
the Smart ID technology before the system will power up.
Replace the power supply adapter with the HP-supplied USDT
power supply adapter.
Solving Power Problems
271
Solving Diskette Problems
Common causes and solutions for diskette problems are listed in the following table.
NOTE: The computer does not support internal diskette drives. Only USB diskette drives are
supported.
NOTE: You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an
additional diskette drive. See Solving Hardware Installation Problems on page 290 for instructions.
Table D-3 Solving Diskette Problems
Diskette drive light stays on.
Cause
Solution
Diskette is damaged.
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore,
and select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under
Error-checking click Check Now.
In Microsoft Windows Vista and Windows 7, right-click
Start, click Explore, and right-click on a drive. Select
Properties then select the Tools tab. Under Errorchecking click Check Now.
Diskette is incorrectly inserted.
Remove diskette and reinsert.
Drive cable is not properly connected.
Reconnect drive cable. Ensure that all four pins on the diskette
power cable are connected to the drive.
Drive not found.
Cause
Solution
Cable is loose.
Reseat diskette drive data and power cable.
Removable drive is not seated properly.
Reseat the drive.
The device has been hidden in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the Legacy Diskette in Security > Device
Security.
Diskette drive cannot write to a diskette.
Cause
Solution
Diskette is not formatted.
Format the diskette.
Diskette is write-protected.
272
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
1.
From Windows Explorer select the disk (A) drive.
2.
Right-click the drive letter and select Format.
3.
Select the desired options, and click Start to begin
formatting the diskette.
Use another diskette or remove the write protection.
Table D-3 Solving Diskette Problems (continued)
Diskette drive cannot write to a diskette.
Cause
Solution
Writing to the wrong drive.
Check the drive letter in the path statement.
Not enough space is left on the diskette.
1.
Use another diskette.
2.
Delete unneeded files from diskette.
Diskette is damaged.
Replace the damaged disk.
Cannot format diskette.
Cause
Solution
Invalid media reported.
When formatting a disk in MS-DOS, you may need to specify
diskette capacity. For example, to format a 1.44-MB diskette,
type the following command at the MS-DOS prompt:
FORMAT A: /F:1440
Disk may be write-protected.
Open the locking device on the diskette.
Legacy diskette writes are disabled in Computer Setup.
Enter Computer Setup and enable Legacy Diskette Write
in Storage > Storage Options.
A problem has occurred with a disk transaction.
Cause
Solution
The directory structure is bad, or there is a problem with a file.
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore,
and select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under
Error-checking, click Check Now.
In Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7, right-click Start,
click Explore, and right-click on a drive. Select
Properties then select the Tools tab. Under Errorchecking click Check Now.
Diskette drive cannot read a diskette.
Cause
Solution
You are using the wrong diskette type for the drive type.
Check the type of drive that you are using and use the correct
diskette type.
You are reading the wrong drive.
Check the drive letter in the path statement.
Diskette is damaged.
Replace the diskette with a new one.
Solving Diskette Problems
273
“Invalid system disk” message is displayed.
Cause
Solution
A diskette that does not contain the system files needed to start
the computer has been inserted in the drive.
When drive activity stops, remove the diskette and press the
Spacebar. The computer should start up.
Diskette error has occurred.
Restart the computer by pressing the power button.
Cannot Boot to Diskette.
Cause
Solution
Diskette is not bootable.
Replace with a bootable diskette.
Diskette boot has been disabled in Computer Setup.
1.
Run Computer Setup and enable USB device in
Storage > Boot Order.
2.
Run Computer Setup and enable USB device in
Storage > Storage Options > Removable Media
Boot.
NOTE: Both steps should be used as the Removable
Media Boot function in Computer Setup overrides the Boot
Order enable command.
Network server mode is enabled in Computer Setup.
274
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Run Computer Setup and disable Network Server Mode
in Security > Password Options.
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems
Hard drive error occurs.
Cause
Solution
Hard disk has bad sectors or has failed.
1.
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click
Explore, and select a drive. Select File >
Properties > Tools. Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
In Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7, right-click
Start, click Explore, and right-click on a drive. Select
Properties then select the Tools tab. Under Errorchecking click Check Now.
2.
Use a utility to locate and block usage of bad sectors. If
necessary, reformat the hard disk.
Disk transaction problem.
Cause
Solution
Either the directory structure is bad or there is a problem with
a file.
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click Start, click Explore,
and select a drive. Select File > Properties > Tools. Under
Error-checking, click Check Now.
In Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7, right-click Start,
click Explore, and right-click on a drive. Select
Properties then select the Tools tab. Under Errorchecking click Check Now.
Drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly
installed device.
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware
Installation Problems on page 290 section. If the system still
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the device
is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the probable
cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the probable cause
is a hardware problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup utility
and try adding a POST delay under Advanced > PowerOn.
Solving Hard Drive Problems
275
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems (continued)
Drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in
Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in
Advanced > Power-On Options.
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR missing message.
Cause
Solution
The system is trying to start from a diskette that is not
bootable.
Remove the diskette from the diskette drive.
The system is trying to start from the hard drive but the hard
drive may have been damaged.
1.
Insert a bootable diskette into the diskette drive and
restart the computer.
2.
Check the hard drive format using fdisk: If NTFS
formatting, use a third party reader to evaluate the drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard drive cannot be accessed.
1.
Insert a bootable diskette into the diskette drive and
restart the computer.
2.
Check the hard drive format using Fdisk: If NFTFS
formatting, use a third party reader to evaluate the drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard drive cannot be accessed.
3.
Install system files for the appropriate operating system.
System files missing or not properly installed.
Hard drive boot has been disabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable the hard drive entry
in the Storage > Boot Order list.
Bootable hard drive is not attached as first in a multi-hard
drive configuration.
If attempting to boot from a hard drive, ensure it is attached to
the system board dark blue SATA connector.
Bootable hard drive's controller is not listed first in the Boot
Order.
Run the Computer Setup utility and select Storage > Boot
Order and ensure the bootable hard drive's controller is
listed immediately under the Hard Drive entry.
Computer will not boot from hard drive.
276
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in
Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Boot order is not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-4 Solving Hard Drive Problems (continued)
Computer will not boot from hard drive.
Cause
Solution
Hard Drive's “Emulation Type” is set to “None.”
Run the Computer Setup utility and change the “Emulation
Type” to “Hard Disk” in the device's details under Storage >
Device Configuration.
Hard drive is damaged.
Observe if the front panel Power LED is blinking RED and if
any beeps are heard. See Appendix A, POST Error Messages
on page 250 to determine possible causes for the blinking red
and beep codes.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer seems to be locked up.
Cause
Solution
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
Attempt the normal Windows “Shut Down” procedure. If this
fails, press the power button for four or more seconds to turn
off the power. To restart the computer, press the power button
again.
The removable hard drive has no power to the hard drive enclosure.
Cause
Solution
The lock on the enclosure is not turned to the “ON” position.
Insert the key and turn the lock clockwise 90 degrees. The
green LED on the front of the enclosure should be on.
Power cable from the computer power supply to the enclosure
frame is not properly connected.
Check the power supply to make sure it is properly connected
to the rear of the enclosure frame.
The removable hard drive is not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
The removable hard drive carrier is not fully seated in the
enclosure frame or the hard drive is not fully seated in the
carrier.
Push the carrier into the enclosure frame so that the connector
on the rear of the frame is properly seated. If this does not
solve the problem, turn off the computer, remove the carrier,
and check to see if the connector on the hard drive is properly
seated in the carrier.
The removable hard drive enclosure is beeping and the green LED is flashing.
Cause
Solution
Fan failure alarm on the removable hard drive enclosure has
been activated.
Shut down the computer and contact HP for a replacement
enclosure.
Solving Hard Drive Problems
277
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Table D-5 Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Media card will not work in a digital camera after formatting it in Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft
Windows Vista.
Cause
Solution
By default, Windows will format any media card with a
capacity greater than 32MB with the FAT32 format. Most
digital cameras use the FAT (FAT16 & FAT12) format and can
not operate with a FAT32 formatted card.
Either format the media card in the digital camera or select
FAT file system to format the media card in a computer with
Windows.
A write-protected or locked error occurs when attempting to write to the media card.
Cause
Solution
Media card is locked. Locking the media card is a safety
feature that prevents writing to and deleting from an SD/
Memory Stick/PRO card.
If using an SD card, make sure that the lock tab located on the
right of the SD card is not in the locked position. If using a
Memory Stick/PRO card, make sure that the lock tab located
on the bottom of the Memory Stick/PRO card is not in the
locked position.
Can not write to the media card.
Cause
Solution
The media card is a read-only memory (ROM) card.
Check the manufacturer’s documentation included with your
card to see if it writable. Refer to the previous section for a list
of compatible cards.
Media card is locked. Locking the media card is a safety
feature that prevents writing to and deleting from an SD/
Memory Stick/PRO card.
If using an SD card, make sure that the lock tab located on the
right of the SD card is not in the locked position. If using a
Memory Stick/PRO card, make sure that the lock tab located
on the bottom of the Memory Stick/PRO card is not in the
locked position.
Unable to access data on the media card after inserting it into a slot.
278
Cause
Solution
The media card is not inserted properly, is inserted in the
wrong slot, or is not supported.
Ensure that the card is inserted properly with the gold contact
on the correct side. The green LED will light if inserted
properly.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Do not know how to remove a media card correctly.
Cause
Solution
The computer’s software is used to safely eject the card.
Open My Computer (Windows XP) or Computer
(Windows Vista/Windows 7), right-click on the corresponding
drive icon, and select Eject. Then pull the card out of the slot.
NOTE: Never remove the card when the green LED is
flashing
After installing the media card reader and booting to Windows, the reader and the inserted cards are
not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
The operating system needs time to recognize the device if the
reader was just installed into the computer and you are
turning the PC on for the first time.
Wait a few seconds so that the operating system can
recognize the reader and the available ports, and then
recognize whatever media is inserted in the reader.
After inserting a media card in the reader, the computer attempts to boot from the media card.
Cause
Solution
The inserted media card has boot capability.
If you do not want to boot from the media card, remove it
during boot or do not select the option to boot from the
inserted media card during the boot process.
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
279
Solving Display Problems
If you encounter display problems, see the documentation that came with the monitor and to the
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-6 Solving Display Problems
Blank screen (no video).
Cause
Solution
Monitor is not turned on and the monitor light is not on.
Turn on the monitor and check that the monitor light is on.
Bad monitor.
Try a different monitor.
The cable connections are not correct.
Check the cable connection from the monitor to the computer
and to the electrical outlet.
You may have a screen blanking utility installed or energy
saver features are enabled.
Press any key or click the mouse button and, if set, type your
password.
System ROM is corrupted; system is running in Boot Block
Emergency Recovery Mode (indicated by eight beeps).
Reflash the system ROM with the latest BIOS image.
You are using a fixed-sync monitor and it will not sync at the
resolution chosen.
Be sure that the monitor can accept the same horizontal scan
rate as the resolution chosen.
Computer is in standby mode.
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby
mode, do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will
lose any unsaved data.
Monitor cable is plugged into the wrong connector.
Systems may have a monitor connection on both the
motherboard or an add-in card. Try moving the monitor
connection to a different connector on the back of the
computer
Monitor settings in the computer are not compatible with the
monitor.
1.
In Windows XP Control Panel, double-click the Display
icon and select the Settings tab.
In Windows Vista or Windows 7 Control Panel, under
Appearance and Personalization, select Adjust
screen resolution.
2.
Monitor is configured to use an input that is not active.
280
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Use the sliding control to reset the resolution.
Use the monitor's on-screen menu controls to select the input
that is being driven by the system. Refer to the monitor's user
documentation for more information on the on-screen controls
and settings.
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second
pause, and the computer beeps five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Pre-video memory error.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second
pause, and the computer beeps six times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Pre-video graphics error.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card. Power on the system.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system
board.
Blank screen and the power LED flashes Red seven times, once every second, followed by a two second
pause, and the computer beeps seven times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
System board failure (ROM detected failure prior to video).
Replace the system board.
Monitor does not function properly when used with energy saver features.
Cause
Solution
Monitor without energy saver capabilities is being used with
energy saver features enabled.
Disable monitor energy saver feature.
Dim characters.
Cause
Solution
The brightness and contrast controls are not set properly.
Adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls.
Cables are not properly connected.
Check that the graphics cable is securely connected to the
graphics card and the monitor.
Solving Display Problems
281
Blurry video or requested resolution cannot be set.
Cause
Solution
If the graphics controller was upgraded, the correct graphics
drivers may not be loaded.
Install the video drivers included in the upgrade kit.
Monitor is not capable of displaying requested resolution.
Change requested resolution.
Graphics card is bad.
Replace the graphics card.
The picture is broken up, rolls, jitters, or flashes.
Cause
Solution
The monitor connections may be incomplete or the monitor
may be incorrectly adjusted.
1.
Be sure the monitor cable is securely connected to the
computer.
2.
In a two-monitor system or if another monitor is in close
proximity, be sure the monitors are not interfering with
each other’s electromagnetic field by moving them apart.
3.
Fluorescent lights or fans may be too close to the
monitor.
Monitor needs to be degaussed.
Degauss the monitor. Refer to the documentation that came
with the monitor for instructions.
Image is not centered.
Cause
Solution
Position may need adjustment.
Press the monitor's Menu button to access the OSD menu.
Select ImageControl/ Horizontal Position or Vertical
Position to adjust the horizontal or vertical position of the
image.
“No Connection, Check Signal Cable” displays on screen.
Cause
Solution
Monitor video cable is disconnected.
Connect the video cable between the monitor and computer.
CAUTION: Ensure that the computer power is off while
connecting the video cable.
“Out of Range” displays on screen.
282
Cause
Solution
Video resolution and refresh rate are set higher than what the
monitor supports.
Restart the computer and enter Safe Mode. Change the
settings to a supported setting then restart the computer so that
the new settings take effect.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Vibrating or rattling noise coming from inside a CRT monitor when powered on.
Cause
Solution
Monitor degaussing coil has been activated.
None. It is normal for the degaussing coil to be activated
when the monitor is powered on.
Clicking noise coming from inside a CRT monitor.
Cause
Solution
Electronic relays have been activated inside the monitor.
None. It is normal for some monitors to make a clicking noise
when turned on and off, when going in and out of standby
mode, and when changing resolutions.
High pitched noise coming from inside a flat panel monitor.
Cause
Solution
Brightness and/or contrast settings are too high.
Lower brightness and/or contrast settings.
Fuzzy focus; streaking, ghosting, or shadowing effects; horizontal scrolling lines; faint vertical bars; or
unable to center the picture on the screen (flat panel monitors using an analog VGA input connection
only).
Cause
Solution
Flat panel monitor’s internal digital conversion circuits may be
unable to correctly interpret the output synchronization of the
graphics card.
1.
Select the monitor’s Auto-Adjustment option in the
monitor’s on-screen display menu.
2.
Manually synchronize the Clock and Clock Phase onscreen display functions. To download a SoftPaq that will
assist you with the synchronization, go to the following
Web site, select the appropriate monitor, and download
either SP32347 or SP32202: http://www.hp.com/
support
Graphics card is not seated properly or is bad.
1.
Reseat the graphics card.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
Certain typed symbols do not appear correct.
Cause
Solution
The font you are using does not support that particular
symbol.
Use the Character Map to locate and select the appropriate
symbol. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
System Tools > Character Map. You can copy the
symbol from the Character Map into a document.
Solving Display Problems
283
Solving Audio Problems
If the computer has audio features and you encounter audio problems, see the common causes and
solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-7 Solving Audio Problems
Sound cuts in and out.
Cause
Solution
Processor resources are being used by other open
applications.
Shut down all open processor-intensive applications.
Direct sound latency, common in many media player
applications.
In Windows XP only:
1.
From the Control Panel, select Sounds and Audio
Devices.
2.
On the Audio tab, select a device from the Sound
Playback list.
3.
Click the Advanced button and select the
Performance tab.
4.
Set the Hardware acceleration slider to None and
the Sample rate conversion quality slider to Good
and retest the audio.
5.
Set the Hardware acceleration slider to Full and the
Sample rate conversion quality slider to Best and
retest the audio.
Sound does not come out of the speaker or headphones.
284
Cause
Solution
Software volume control is turned down or muted.
Double-click the Speaker icon on the taskbar, then make
sure that Mute is not selected and use the volume slider to
adjust the volume.
Audio is hidden in Computer Setup.
Enable the audio in Computer Setup: Security >
Device Security > System Audio.
The external speakers are not turned on.
Turn on the external speakers.
The audio device may be connected to the wrong jack.
Ensure that the device is connected to the correct jack on the
computer. The speakers should be plugged into the rear lineout jack and the headphones should be plugged into the front
headphone jack.
External speakers plugged into the wrong audio jack on a
recently installed sound card.
See the sound card documentation for proper speaker
connection.
Digital CD audio is not enabled.
Enable digital CD audio. In the Device Manager, right-click on
the CD/DVD device and select Properties. Make sure
Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device is
checked.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-7 Solving Audio Problems (continued)
Sound does not come out of the speaker or headphones.
Cause
Solution
Headphones or devices connected to the line-out connector
mute the internal speaker.
Turn on and use headphones or external speakers, if
connected, or disconnect headphones or external speakers.
Computer is in standby mode.
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby
mode, do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will
lose any unsaved data.
Internal speaker is disabled in Computer Setup.
Enable the internal speaker in Computer Setup. Select
Advanced > Device Options > Internal Speaker.
The application is set to use a different audio device than
speakers.
Some graphics cards support audio over the DisplayPort
connection, so multiple audio devices may be listed in Device
Manager. Make sure the correct device is being used.
Some applications can select which audio output device is
used.
Make sure the application has selected the correct audio
device.
The operating system controls may be set to use a different
audio device as the default output device than what is
expected.
Set the operating system to use the correct audio device.
Sound from headphones is not clear or muffled.
Cause
Solution
Headphones are plugged into the rear audio output
connector. The rear audio output connector is for powered
audio devices and is not designed for headphone use.
Plug the headphones into the headphone connector on the
front of the computer.
Computer appears to be locked up while recording audio.
Cause
Solution
The hard disk may be full.
Before recording, make sure there is enough free space on the
hard disk. You can also try recording the audio file in a
compressed format.
Line-in jack is not functioning properly.
Cause
Solution
Jack has been reconfigured in the audio driver or application
software.
In the audio driver or application software, reconfigure the
jack or set the jack to its default value.
Solving Audio Problems
285
There is no sound or sound volume is too low.
Cause
Solution
The application is set to use a different audio device than
speakers.
Some graphics cards support audio over the DisplayPort
connection, so multiple audio devices may be listed in Device
Manager. Make sure the correct device is being used.
Some applications can select which audio output device is
used.
Make sure the application has selected the correct audio
device.
The operating system controls may be set to use a different
audio device as the default output device than what is
expected.
Set the operating system to use the correct audio device.
Solving Printer Problems
If you encounter printer problems, see the documentation that came with the printer and to the common
causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-8 Solving Printer Problems
Printer will not print.
Cause
Solution
Printer is not turned on and online.
Turn the printer on and make sure it is online.
The correct printer drivers for the application are not installed.
1.
Install the correct printer driver for the application.
2.
Try printing using the MS-DOS command:
DIR C:\ > [printer port]
where [printer port] is the address of the printer being
used. If the printer works, reload the printer driver.
If you are on a network, you may not have made the
connection to the printer.
Make the proper network connections to the printer.
Printer may have failed.
Run printer self-test.
Printer will not turn on.
Cause
Solution
The cables may not be connected properly.
Reconnect all cables and check the power cord and electrical
outlet.
Printer prints garbled information.
286
Cause
Solution
The correct printer driver for the application is not installed.
Install the correct printer driver for the application.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-8 Solving Printer Problems (continued)
Printer prints garbled information.
Cause
Solution
The cables may not be connected properly.
Reconnect all cables.
Printer memory may be overloaded.
Reset the printer by turning it off for one minute, then turn it
back on.
Printer is offline.
Cause
Solution
The printer may be out of paper.
Check the paper tray and refill it if it is empty. Select online.
Solving Printer Problems
287
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
If you encounter keyboard or mouse problems, see the documentation that came with the equipment
and to the common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-9 Solving Keyboard Problems
Keyboard commands and typing are not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
Keyboard connector is not properly connected.
1.
On the Windows XP Desktop, click Start > Shut
Down.
On the Windows Vista or Windows 7 Desktop, click
Start, click the arrow on the lower right corner of the
Start menu, then select Shut Down.
2.
After the shutdown is complete, reconnect the keyboard
to the back of the computer and restart the computer.
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
Shut down your computer using the mouse and then restart the
computer.
Keyboard needs repairs.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer is in standby mode.
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby
mode, do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will
lose any unsaved data.
Cursor will not move using the arrow keys on the keypad.
288
Cause
Solution
The Num Lock key may be on.
Press the Num Lock key. The Num Lock light should not be on
if you want to use the arrow keys. The Num Lock key can be
disabled (or enabled) in Computer Setup.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-10 Solving Mouse Problems
Mouse does not respond to movement or is too slow.
Cause
Solution
Mouse connector is not properly plugged into the back of the
computer.
Shut down the computer using the keyboard.
1.
Press the Ctrl and Esc keys at the same time (or press the
Windows logo key) to display the Start menu.
2.
Use the arrow keys to select Shut Down and then press
the Enter key.
3.
After the shutdown is complete, plug the mouse
connector into the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart.
Program in use has stopped responding to commands.
Shut down the computer using the keyboard then restart the
computer.
Mouse may need cleaning.
Remove the roller ball cover on the mouse and clean the
internal components.
Mouse may need repair.
See the Worldwide Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer is in standby mode.
Press the power button to resume from standby mode.
CAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby
mode, do not hold down the power button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will
lose any unsaved data.
Mouse will only move vertically, horizontally, or movement is jerky.
Cause
Solution
Mouse roller ball or the rotating encoder shafts that make
contact with the ball are dirty.
Remove roller ball cover from the bottom of the mouse and
clean the internal components with a mouse cleaning kit
available from most computer stores.
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
289
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an additional
drive or expansion card. If you install a plug and play device, Windows automatically recognizes the
device and configures the computer. If you install a non–plug and play device, you must reconfigure the
computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows, use the Add Hardware
Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
WARNING! When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to
the system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool
before touching.
Table D-11 Solving Hardware Installation Problems
A new device is not recognized as part of the system.
290
Cause
Solution
Device is not seated or connected properly.
Ensure that the device is properly and securely connected and
that pins in the connector are not bent down.
Cable(s) of new external device are loose or power cables
are unplugged.
Ensure that all cables are properly and securely connected
and that pins in the cable or connector are not bent down.
Power switch of new external device is not turned on.
Turn off the computer, turn on the external device, then turn on
the computer to integrate the device with the computer system.
When the system advised you of changes to the configuration,
you did not accept them.
Reboot the computer and follow the instructions for accepting
the changes.
A plug and play board may not automatically configure when
added if the default configuration conflicts with other devices.
Use Windows Device Manager to deselect the automatic
settings for the board and choose a basic configuration that
does not cause a resource conflict. You can also use
Computer Setup to reconfigure or disable devices to resolve
the resource conflict.
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that Device
available is selected for appropriate USB ports under
Security > USB Security.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Computer will not start.
Cause
Solution
Wrong memory modules were used in the upgrade or
memory modules were installed in the wrong location.
1.
Review the documentation that came with the system to
determine if you are using the correct memory modules
and to verify the proper installation.
NOTE: DIMM1 or XMM1 must always be installed. On
all computers expect the USDT, DIMM1 must be installed
before DIMM2, and DIMM3 must be installed before
DIMM4.
2.
Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the
computer. Beeps and flashing LEDs are codes for specific
problems.
3.
If you still cannot resolve the issue, contact Customer
Support.
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the
computer beeps five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system
board, you must unplug the computer power cord before
attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
NOTE: DIMM1 or XMM1 must always be installed. On
all computers expect the USDT, DIMM1 must be installed
before DIMM2, and DIMM3 must be installed before
DIMM4
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
291
Power LED flashes Red six times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer
beeps six times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Graphics card is not seated properly or is bad, or system
board is bad.
For systems with a graphics card:
1.
Reseat the graphics card. Power on the system.
2.
Replace the graphics card.
3.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics, replace the system
board.
Power LED flashes Red ten times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the computer
beeps ten times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Bad option card.
1.
Check each option card by removing the cards one at
time (if multiple cards), then power on the system to see if
fault goes away.
2.
Once bad card is identified, remove and replace bad
option card.
3.
Replace the system board.
Solving Network Problems
Some common causes and solutions for network problems are listed in the following table. These
guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.
Table D-12 Solving Network Problems
Wake-on-LAN feature is not functioning.
292
Cause
Solution
S5 Maximum Power Saving feature is enabled.
Disable the S5 Maximum Power Saving option in Computer
Setup. Select Power > Hardware Power Management
> S5 Maximum Power Saving.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-12 Solving Network Problems (continued)
Wake-on-LAN feature is not functioning.
Cause
Solution
S5 Wake on LAN is disabled.
: Enable the S5 Wake on LAN option in Computer Setup.
Select Advanced > Device Options > S5 Wake on
LAN.
Wake-on-LAN is not enabled.
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows XP:
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Double-click Network Connections.
3.
Double-click Local Area Connection.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click Configure.
6.
Click the Power Management tab, then select the
check box to Allow this device to bring the
computer out of standby.
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows Vista:
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Under Network and Internet, select View
network status and tasks.
3.
In the Tasks list, select Manage network
connections.
4.
Double-click Local Area Connection.
5.
Click the Properties button.
6.
Click the Configure button.
7.
Click the Power Management tab, then select the
check box to Allow this device to wake the
computer.
To enable Wake-on-LAN in Windows 7:
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Under Network and Internet, select View
network status and tasks.
3.
Click Local Area Connection.
4.
Click the Properties button.
5.
Click the Configure button.
6.
Click the Power Management tab, then select the
check box to Allow this device to wake the
computer.
Solving Network Problems
293
Network driver does not detect network controller.
Cause
Solution
Network controller is disabled.
1.
Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.
2.
Enable the network controller in the operating system via
Device Manager.
Incorrect network driver.
Check the network controller documentation for the correct
driver or obtain the latest driver from the manufacturer’s Web
site.
Network status link light never flashes.
NOTE:
The network status light is supposed to flash when there is network activity.
Cause
Solution
No active network is detected.
Check cabling and network equipment for proper connection.
Network controller is not set up properly.
Check for the device status within Windows, such as Device
Manager for driver load and the Network Connections applet
within Windows for link status.
Network controller is disabled.
1.
Run Computer Setup and enable network controller.
2.
Enable the network controller in the operating system via
Device Manager.
Network driver is not properly loaded.
Reinstall network drivers.
System cannot autosense the network.
Disable auto-sensing capabilities and force the system into the
correct operating mode.
Diagnostics reports a failure.
294
Cause
Solution
The cable is not securely connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely
attached to the correct device.
The cable is attached to the incorrect connector.
Ensure that the cable is attached to the correct connector.
There is a problem with the cable or a device at the other end
of the cable.
Ensure that the cable and device at the other end are
operating correctly.
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion
board.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller is defective.
Contact an authorized service provider.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Diagnostics passes, but the computer does not communicate with the network.
Cause
Solution
Network drivers are not loaded, or driver parameters do not
match current configuration.
Make sure the network drivers are loaded and that the driver
parameters match the configuration of the network controller.
Make sure the correct network client and protocol is installed.
The network controller is not configured for this computer.
Select the Network icon in the Control Panel and
configure the network controller.
Network controller stopped working when an expansion board was added to the computer.
Cause
Solution
Network controller interrupt is shared with an expansion
board.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller requires drivers.
Verify that the drivers were not accidentally deleted when the
drivers for a new expansion board were installed.
The expansion board installed is a network card (NIC) and
conflicts with the embedded NIC.
Under the Computer Setup Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
Network controller stops working without apparent cause.
Cause
Solution
The files containing the network drivers are corrupted.
Reinstall the network drivers, using the Recovery Disc Set
created from the hard drive's Recovery Partition.
The cable is not securely connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely attached to the network
connector and that the other end of the cable is securely
attached to the correct device.
The network controller is defective.
Contact an authorized service provider.
New network card will not boot.
Cause
Solution
New network card may be defective or may not meet industrystandard specifications.
Install a working, industry-standard NIC, or change the boot
sequence to boot from another source.
Cannot connect to network server when attempting Remote System Installation.
Cause
Solution
The network controller is not configured properly.
Verify Network Connectivity, that a DHCP Server is present,
and that the Remote System Installation Server contains the
NIC drivers for your NIC.
Solving Network Problems
295
System setup utility reports unprogrammed EEPROM.
Cause
Solution
Unprogrammed EEPROM.
Contact an authorized service provider.
Solving Memory Problems
If you encounter memory problems, some common causes and solutions are listed in the following
table.
CAUTION: Power may still be supplied to the DIMMs when the computer is turned off (depending on
the Management Engine (ME) settings). To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system board, you must
unplug the computer power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.
For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC memory.
Otherwise, the computer will not boot the operating system.
NOTE: The memory count will be affected by configurations with the Management Engine (ME)
enabled. The ME uses 8MB of system memory in single channel mode or 16MB of memory in dualchannel mode to download, decompress, and execute the ME firmware for Out-of-Band (OOB), thirdparty data storage, and other management functions.
Table D-13 Solving Memory Problems
System will not boot or does not function properly after installing additional memory modules.
Cause
Solution
A memory module is not installed in the DIMM1 or XMM1
socket.
Ensure that a memory module is installed in the DIMM1 or
XMM1 socket on the system board. This socket must be
populated with a memory module.
Memory module is not the correct type or speed grade for the
system or the new memory module is not seated properly.
Replace module with the correct industry-standard device for
the computer. On some models, ECC and non-ECC memory
modules cannot be mixed.
Out of memory error.
296
Cause
Solution
Memory configuration may not be set up correctly.
Use the Device Manager to check memory configuration.
You have run out of memory to run the application.
Check the application documentation to determine the
memory requirements.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Memory count during POST is wrong.
Cause
Solution
The memory modules may not be installed correctly.
Check that the memory modules have been installed correctly
and that proper modules are used.
Integrated graphics may use system memory.
No action required.
Insufficient memory error during operation.
Cause
Solution
Too many Terminate and Stay Resident programs (TSRs) are
installed.
Delete any TSRs that you do not need.
You have run out of memory for the application.
Check the memory requirements for the application or add
more memory to the computer.
Power LED flashes Red five times, once every second, followed by a two second pause, and the
computer beeps five times. (Beeps stop after fifth iteration but LEDs continue flashing.)
Cause
Solution
Memory is installed incorrectly or is bad.
1.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
2.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate the faulty
module.
3.
Replace third-party memory with HP memory.
4.
Replace the system board.
Solving Processor Problems
If you encounter processor problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following table.
Table D-14 Solving Processor Problems
Poor performance is experienced.
Cause
Solution
Processor is hot.
1.
Make sure the airflow to the computer is not blocked.
2.
Make sure the fans are connected and working properly
(some fans only operate when needed).
3.
Make sure the processor heat sink is installed properly.
Solving Processor Problems
297
Power LED flashes Red three times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.
Cause
Solution
Processor is not seated properly or not installed.
1.
Check to see that the processor is present.
2.
Reseat the processor.
Power LED flashes Red eleven times, once every second, followed by a two second pause.
Cause
Solution
The current processor does not support a feature previously
enabled on this system.
1.
Install a TXT capable processor.
2.
Disable TXT in the Computer Setup (F10) utility.
3.
Reinstall the original processor.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
If you encounter CD-ROM or DVD problems, see the common causes and solutions listed in the
following table or to the documentation that came with the optional device.
Table D-15 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
System will not boot from CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in
the Computer Setup utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure
CD-ROM is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.
Network Server Mode is enabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and disable Network Server
Mode in Security > Password Options.
Non-bootable CD in drive.
Try a bootable CD in the drive.
Boot order not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Drive not found (identified).
298
Cause
Solution
Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-15 Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (continued)
Drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
The system may not have automatically recognized a newly
installed device.
See reconfiguration directions in the Solving Hardware
Installation Problems on page 290 section. If the system still
does not recognize the new device, check to see if the device
is listed within Computer Setup. If it is listed, the probable
cause is a driver problem. If it is not listed, the probable cause
is a hardware problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run the Computer Setup utility
and try adding a POST delay under Advanced > PowerOn Options.
The device is attached to a SATA port that has been hidden in
Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure Device Available
is selected for the device's SATA port in Security > Device
Security.
Drive responds slowly immediately after power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase the POST Delay in
Advanced > Power-On Options.
CD-ROM or DVD devices are not detected or driver is not loaded.
Cause
Solution
Drive is not connected properly or not properly configured.
See the documentation that came with the optional device.
Movie will not play in the DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
Movie may be regionalized for a different country.
See the documentation that came with the DVD drive.
Decoder software is not installed.
Install decoder software.
Damaged media.
Replace media.
Movie rating locked out by parental lock.
Use DVD software to remove parental lock.
Media installed upside down.
Reinstall media.
Cannot eject compact disc (tray-load unit).
Cause
Solution
Disc not properly seated in the drive.
Turn off the computer and insert a thin metal rod into the
emergency eject hole and push firmly. Slowly pull the tray out
from the drive until the tray is fully extended, then remove
the disc.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
299
CD-ROM, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW drive cannot read a disc or takes too long to start.
Cause
Solution
Media has been inserted upside down.
Re-insert the media with the label facing up.
The DVD-ROM drive takes longer to start because it has to
determine the type of media played, such as audio or video.
Wait at least 30 seconds to let the DVD-ROM drive determine
the type of media being played. If the disc still does not start,
read the other solutions listed for this topic.
CD or DVD disc is dirty.
Clean CD or DVD with a CD cleaning kit, available from most
computer stores.
Windows does not detect the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive.
1.
Use Device Manager to remove or uninstall the device.
2.
Restart the computer and let Windows detect the CD or
DVD driver.
Recording or copying CDs is difficult or impossible.
Cause
Solution
Wrong or poor quality media type.
1.
Try using a slower speed when recording.
2.
Verify that you are using the correct media for the drive.
3.
Try a different brand of media. Quality varies widely
between manufacturers.
USDT computer boots too slow after removing a CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Cause
Solution
The system is searching for the drive during boot because the
drive cable is still attached to the system board.
Disconnect the drive cable from the system board.
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
If you encounter USB flash drive problems, common causes and solutions are listed in the following
table.
Table D-16 Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
USB flash drive is not seen as a drive letter in Windows.
300
Cause
Solution
The drive letter after the last physical drive is not available.
Change the default drive letter for the flash drive in Windows.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
USB flash drive not found (identified).
Cause
Solution
The device is attached to a USB port that has been hidden in
Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that “Device
available” is selected for “Front USB Ports” and “Rear USB
Ports” under Security > Device Security.
The device was not properly seated before power-up.
Ensure the device is fully inserted into the USB port before
applying power to the system
System will not boot from USB flash drive.
Cause
Solution
Boot order is not correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and change boot sequence in
Storage > Boot Order.
Removable Media Boot is disabled in the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and enable booting to
removable media in Storage > Storage Options. Ensure
USB is enabled in Storage > Boot Order.
The computer boots to DOS after making a bootable flash drive.
Cause
Solution
Flash drive is bootable.
Install the flash drive only after the operating system boots.
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
301
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
If you encounter problems with devices connected to the front panel, refer to the common causes and
solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-17 Solving Front Panel Component Problems
A USB device, headphone, or microphone is not recognized by the computer.
Cause
Solution
Device is not properly connected.
1.
Turn off the computer.
2.
Reconnect the device to the front of the computer and
restart the computer.
The device does not have power.
If the USB device requires AC power, be sure one end is
connected to the device and one end is connected to a live
outlet.
The correct device driver is not installed.
1.
Install the correct driver for the device.
2.
You might need to reboot the computer.
1.
If possible, replace the cable.
2.
Restart the computer.
1.
Replace the device.
2.
Restart the computer.
The cable from the device to the computer does not work.
The device is not working.
USB ports on the computer are disabled in Computer Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and ensure that Device
available is selected for appropriate USB ports under
Security > USB Security.
Solving Internet Access Problems
If you encounter Internet access problems, consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or refer to the
common causes and solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-18 Solving Internet Access Problems
Unable to connect to the Internet.
302
Cause
Solution
Internet Service Provider (ISP) account is not set up properly.
Verify Internet settings or contact your ISP for assistance.
Modem is not set up properly.
Reconnect the modem. Verify the connections are correct
using the quick setup documentation.
Web browser is not set up properly.
Verify that the Web browser is installed and set up to work
with your ISP.
Cable/DSL modem is not plugged in.
Plug in cable/DSL modem. You should see a “power” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL modem.
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Table D-18 Solving Internet Access Problems (continued)
Unable to connect to the Internet.
Cause
Solution
Cable/DSL service is not available or has been interrupted
due to bad weather.
Try connecting to the Internet at a later time or contact your
ISP. (If the cable/DSL service is connected, the “cable” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL modem will be on.)
The CAT5 UTP cable is disconnected.
Connect the CAT5 UTP cable between the cable modem and
the computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the connection is good,
the “PC” LED light on the front of the cable/DSL modem will
be on.)
IP address is not configured properly.
Contact your ISP for the correct IP address.
Cookies are corrupted. (A “cookie” is a small piece of
information that a Web server can store temporarily with the
Web browser. This is useful for having the browser remember
some specific information that the Web server can later
retrieve.)
Windows 7
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Click Network and Internet.
3.
Click Internet Options.
4.
In the Browsing history section on the General tab,
click the Delete button.
5.
Select the Cookies check box and click the Delete
button.
Windows Vista
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Click Network and Internet.
3.
Click Internet Options.
4.
In the Browsing history section on the General tab,
click the Delete button.
5.
Click the Delete cookies button.
Windows XP
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Double-click Internet Options.
3.
On the General tab, click the Delete Cookies button.
Cannot automatically launch Internet programs.
Cause
Solution
You must log on to your ISP before some programs will start.
Log on to your ISP and launch the desired program.
Solving Internet Access Problems
303
Internet takes too long to download Web sites.
Cause
Solution
Modem is not set up properly.
Verify that the modem is connected and communicating
properly.
Windows 7
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Click on Hardware and Sound.
3.
Click on Device Manager.
4.
Double-click Modems.
5.
Double-click Agere Systems PCI-SV92PP Soft
Modem.
6.
On the General tab, click Diagnostics.
7.
Click Query Modem. A “Success” response indicates
the modem is connected and working properly.
Windows XP
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Double-click System.
3.
Click the Hardware tab.
4.
In the Device Manager area, click the Device
Manager button.
5.
Double-click Modems.
6.
Double-click Agere Systems PCI-SV92PP Soft
Modem.
7.
On the General tab, click Diagnostics.
8.
Click Query Modem. A “Success” response indicates
the modem is connected and working properly.
Windows Vista
304
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
1.
Select Start > Control Panel.
2.
Click on System and Maintenance.
3.
Click on System.
4.
In the Tasks list, select Device Manager.
5.
Double-click Modems.
6.
Double-click Agere Systems PCI-SV92PP Soft
Modem.
7.
On the General tab, click Diagnostics.
8.
Click Query Modem. A “Success” response indicates
the modem is connected and working properly.
Solving Software Problems
Most software problems occur as a result of the following:
●
The application was not installed or configured correctly.
●
There is insufficient memory available to run the application.
●
There is a conflict between applications.
●
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed.
●
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system, check
to be sure it is supported on the system.
If you encounter software problems, see the applicable solutions listed in the following table.
Table D-19 Solving Software Problems
Computer will not continue and no HP logo screen has appeared.
Cause
Solution
POST error has occurred.
Observe the beeps and LED lights on the front of the
computer. See Appendix A, POST Error Messages
on page 250 to determine possible causes.
See the Restore Kit or the Worldwide Limited Warranty for
terms and conditions.
Computer will not continue after HP logo screen has appeared.
Cause
Solution
System files may be damaged.
Use recovery diskette to scan hard drive for errors.
“Illegal Operation has Occurred” error message is displayed.
Cause
Solution
Software being used is not Microsoft-certified for your version
of Windows.
Verify that the software is certified by Microsoft for your
version of Windows (see program packaging for this
information).
Configuration files are corrupt.
If possible, save all data, close all programs, and restart the
computer.
Solving Software Problems
305
Contacting Customer Support
For help and service, contact an authorized reseller or dealer. To locate a reseller or dealer near you,
visit http://www.hp.com.
NOTE: If you take the computer to an authorized reseller, dealer, or service provider for service,
remember to provide the setup and power-on passwords if they are set.
Refer to the number listed in the warranty or in the Support Telephone Numbers guide for technical
assistance.
306
Appendix D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
E
Password Security and Resetting
CMOS
This computer supports security password features, which can be established through the Computer
Setup Utilities menu.
This computer supports two security password features that are established through the Computer Setup
Utilities menu: setup password and power-on password. When you establish only a setup password,
any user can access all the information on the computer except Computer Setup. When you establish
only a power-on password, the power-on password is required to access Computer Setup and any
other information on the computer. When you establish both passwords, only the setup password will
give you access to Computer Setup.
When both passwords are set, the setup password can also be used in place of the power-on
password as an override to log in to the computer. This is a useful feature for a network administrator.
If you forget the password for the computer, you can clear that password so you can gain access to the
information on the computer by resetting the password jumper.
CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button will reset CMOS values to factory defaults. It is important to
back up the computer CMOS settings before resetting them in case they are needed later. Back up is
easily done through Computer Setup. See Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 4 for information on
backing up the CMOS settings.
307
Resetting the Password Jumper
To disable the power-on or setup password features, or to clear the power-on or setup passwords,
complete the following steps:
1.
Shut down the operating system properly, then turn off the computer and any external devices,
and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2.
With the power cord disconnected, press the power button again to drain the system of any
residual power.
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet, and allow the internal system components
to cool before touching.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged in, the power supply always has voltage applied to
the system board even when the unit is turned off. Failure to disconnect the power cord can result
in damage to the system.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly
touching a grounded metal object. See the Safety & Regulatory Information guide for more
information.
3.
Remove the computer cover or access panel.
4.
Locate the header and jumper.
NOTE: The password jumper is green so that it can be easily identified. For assistance locating
the password jumper and other system board components, see the Illustrated Parts & Service Map
(IPSM). The IPSM can be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/support.
308
5.
Remove the jumper from pins 1 and 2. Place the jumper on either pin 1 or 2, but not both, so that
it does not get lost.
6.
Replace the computer cover or access panel.
7.
Reconnect the external equipment.
8.
Plug in the computer and turn on power. Allow the operating system to start. This clears the current
passwords and disables the password features.
9.
To establish new passwords, repeat steps 1 through 4, replace the password jumper on pins 1
and 2, then repeat steps 6 through 8. Establish the new passwords in Computer Setup.
Appendix E Password Security and Resetting CMOS
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS
The computer’s configuration memory (CMOS) stores information about the computer’s configuration.
The CMOS button resets CMOS but does not clear the power-on and setup passwords.
Clearing CMOS will clear the Active Management Technology (AMT) settings in the Management
Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx), including the password. The password will default to “admin” and will
need to be reset. The AMT settings will also need to be reset. To access the MEBx, press Ctrl+P during
POST.
1.
Turn off the computer and any external devices, and disconnect the power cord from the power
outlet.
2.
Disconnect the keyboard, monitor, and any other external equipment connected to the computer.
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be
sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet, and allow the internal system components
to cool before touching.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged in, the power supply always has voltage applied to
the system board even when the unit is turned off. Failure to disconnect the power cord can result
in damage to the system.
Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional equipment.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly
touching a grounded metal object. See the Safety & Regulatory Information guide for more
information.
3.
Remove the computer cover or access panel.
CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button will reset CMOS values to factory defaults. It is important
to back up the computer CMOS settings before resetting them in case they are needed later. Back
up is easily done through Computer Setup. See Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 4 for
information on backing up the CMOS settings.
Clearing and Resetting the CMOS
309
4.
Locate, press, and hold the CMOS button in for five seconds.
NOTE: Make sure you have disconnected the AC power cord from the wall outlet. The CMOS
button will not clear CMOS if the power cord is connected.
Figure E-1 CMOS button
NOTE: For assistance locating the CMOS button and other system board components, see the
Illustrated Parts & Service Map (IPSM).
5.
Replace the computer cover or access panel.
6.
Reconnect the external devices.
7.
Plug in the computer and turn on power.
NOTE: You will receive POST error messages after clearing CMOS and rebooting advising you
that configuration changes have occurred. Use Computer Setup to reset any special system setups
along with the date and time.
For instructions on Computer Setup, see Computer Setup (F10) Utility on page 4.
310
Appendix E Password Security and Resetting CMOS
F
Drive Protection System (DPS)
The Drive Protection System (DPS) is a diagnostic tool built into the hard drives installed in some
computers. DPS is designed to help diagnose problems that might result in unwarranted hard drive
replacement.
When these systems are built, each installed hard drive is tested using DPS, and a permanent record of
key information is written onto the drive. Each time DPS is run, test results are written to the hard drive.
Your service provider can use this information to help diagnose conditions that caused you to run the
DPS software.
Running DPS will not affect any programs or data stored on the hard drive. The test resides in the hard
drive firmware and can be executed even if the computer will not boot to an operating system. The time
required to execute the test depends on the manufacturer and size of the hard drive; in most cases, the
test will take approximately two minutes per gigabyte.
Use DPS when you suspect a hard drive problem. If the computer reports a SMART Hard Drive Detect
Imminent Failure message, there is no need to run DPS; instead, back up the information on the hard
drive and contact a service provider for a replacement hard drive.
311
Accessing DPS Through Computer Setup
When the computer does not power on properly you should use Computer Setup to access the DPS
program. To access DPS, perform the following steps:
1.
Turn on or restart the computer.
2.
When the F10 Setup message appears in the lower-right corner of the screen, press the F10 key.
NOTE: If you do not press the F10 key while the message is displayed, you must turn the
computer off, then on again, to access the utility.
A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage,
Security, Power, and Advanced.
3.
Select Storage > DPS Self-Test.
The screen will display the list of DPS-capable hard drives that are installed on the computer.
NOTE: If no DPS-capable hard drives are installed, the DPS Self-Test option will not appear
on the screen.
4.
Select the hard drive to be tested and follow the screen prompts to complete the testing process.
When the test has been completed, one of three messages will be displayed:
●
Test Succeeded. Completion Code 0.
●
Test Aborted. Completion Code 1 or 2.
●
Test Failed. Drive Replacement Recommended. Completion Code 3 through 14.
If the test failed, the completion code should be recorded and reported to your service provider for help
in diagnosing the computer problem.
312
Appendix F Drive Protection System (DPS)
G
Computer Diagnostic Features
Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics
NOTE: HP Vision Diagnostics is included on CD with some computer models only.
The Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics utility allows you to view information about the hardware
configuration of the computer and perform hardware diagnostic tests on the subsystems of the
computer. The utility simplifies the process of effectively identifying, diagnosing, and isolating hardware
issues.
The Survey tab is displayed when you invoke HP Vision Diagnostics. This tab shows the current
configuration of the computer. From the Survey tab, there is access to several categories of information
about the computer. Other tabs provide additional information, including diagnostic test options and
test results. The information in each screen of the utility can be saved as an html file and stored on a
USB flash drive.
Use HP Vision Diagnostics to determine if all the devices installed on the computer are recognized by
the system and functioning properly. Running tests is optional but recommended after installing or
connecting a new device.
You should run tests, save the test results, and print them so that you have printed reports available
before placing a call to the Customer Support Center.
NOTE: Third party devices may not be detected by HP Vision Diagnostics.
Accessing HP Vision Diagnostics
To access HP Vision Diagnostics, you must create a Recovery Disc Set then boot to the CD containing
the utility. It can also be downloaded from http://www.hp.com and either burned to CD or installed to
a USB flash drive. See Downloading the Latest Version of HP Vision Diagnostics on page 317 for more
information.
NOTE: HP Vision Diagnostics is included as part of the Recovery Disk Set with some computer models
only.
If you have already downloaded HP Vision Diagnostics to either CD or USB Flash drive, then begin the
following procedure at step 2.
1.
In Windows Explorer, go to C:\SWSetup\ISOs and burn the file Vision Diagnostics.ISO to
a CD or copy it to a USB flash drive.
2.
While the computer is on, insert the CD in the Optical Drive or USB flash drive in a USB port on
the computer.
Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics
313
3.
Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer.
4.
Turn on the computer. The system will boot into HP Vision Diagnostics.
NOTE: If the system does not boot to the CD in the optical drive or to the USB flash drive, you
may need to change the boot order in the Computer Setup (F10) utility. Refer to the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility Guide for more information.
5.
At the boot menu, select either the HP Vision Diagnostics utility to test the various hardware
components in the computer or the HP Memory Test utility to test memory only.
NOTE: The HP Memory Test is a comprehensive memory diagnostic utility that is run as a standalone application, outside of HP Vision Diagnostics.
6.
If running HP Vision Diagnostics, select the appropriate language and click Continue.
7.
In the End User License Agreement page, select Agree if you agree with the terms. The HP Vision
Diagnostics utility launches with the Survey tab displayed.
Survey Tab
The Survey tab displays important system configuration information.
In the View level field, you can select the Summary view to see limited configuration data or select
the Advanced view to see all the data in the selected category. By default, the View Level is set to
Overview which displays general information about all of the component categories.
In the Category field, you can select the following categories of information to display:
All—Gives a listing of all categories of information about the computer.
Architecture—Provides system BIOS and PCI device information.
Asset Control—Shows product name, system serial number, asset tag and universal unique ID
information.
Audio—Displays information about the audio controllers present in the system, including PCI audio
cards.
Communication—Shows information about the computer parallel (LPT) and serial (COM) port
settings, plus USB and network controller information.
Graphics—Shows information about the graphics controller of the computer.
Input Devices—Shows information about the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices connected to
the computer.
Memory—Shows information about all memory in the computer. This includes memory slots on the
system board and any memory modules installed.
Processors—Shows information about the processor(s) installed in the computer, including clock
speeds and cache sizes.
Storage—Shows information about storage media connected to the computer. This list includes all
hard drives and optical drives.
System—Shows information about the computer model, internal fans, chassis, and BIOS.
314
Appendix G Computer Diagnostic Features
Test Tab
The Test tab allows you to choose various parts of the system to test. You can also choose the type of
test and testing mode.
There are three types of tests to choose from:
●
Quick Test—Provides a predetermined script where a sample of each hardware component is
exercised. You may further modify which of the Quick tests are executed by selecting or
deselecting individual tests in the hardware component check list.
●
Complete Test—Provides a predetermined script where each hardware component is fully
tested. You may further modify which of the Complete tests are executed by selecting or
deselecting individual tests in the hardware component check list.
●
Custom Test—Provides the most flexibility in controlling the testing of a system. The Custom Test
mode allows you to specifically select which devices, tests, and test parameters are run.
By default, the three test modes do not display prompts and require no interaction. If errors are found,
they are displayed when testing is complete.
However, for each test type, you may also optionally add interactive tests by clicking the Include
interactive tests box under Test mode. Selecting interactive tests provides the maximum control
over the testing process. The diagnostic software will prompt you for input during tests.
NOTE: Memory can not be tested from within the HP Vision Diagnostics application. To test the
memory in your computer, you must exit HP Vision Diagnostics, boot to either the CD or USB flash drive
and select HP Memory Test from the boot menu.
To begin testing:
1.
Select the Test tab.
2.
Select the type of tests you want to run: Quick, Complete, or Custom.
3.
Include optional interactive tests by selecting Include interactive tests.
4.
Choose how you want the test to be executed, either Number of Loops or Total Test Time.
When choosing to run the test over a specified number of loops, enter the number of loops to
perform. If you want the diagnostic test for a specified time period, enter the amount of time in
minutes.
5.
Click the Start Test button to start the testing. The Status tab, which allows you to monitor the
progress of the tests, is automatically displayed during the testing process. When the tests are
complete, the Status tab shows whether the devices passed or failed.
6.
If errors are found, go to the Errors tab to display detailed information and recommended actions.
Status Tab
The Status tab displays the status of the selected tests. The main progress bar displays the percent
complete of the current set of tests. While testing is in progress, a Cancel Testing button is displayed
for use if you want to cancel the test.
Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics
315
The Status tab also shows:
●
The devices being tested
●
The test status (running, waiting, passed, or failed) of each device being tested
●
The overall test progress of all devices being tested
●
The test progress for each device being tested
●
The elapsed test times for each device being tested
History Tab
The History tab contains information on past test executions.
The History Log displays all tests that have been executed, the number of times of execution, the number
of times failed, the date each test was executed, and the time it took to complete each test. The Clear
History button will clear the contents of the History Log.
The contents of the History Log may be saved as a HTML file to USB flash drive by clicking the Save
button.
Errors Tab
The Errors tab displays detailed information about any errors found, as well as any recommended
actions.
The Error Log displays the tests for devices that have failed during the diagnostic testing and includes
the following columns of information.
●
The Device section displays the device tested.
●
The Test section displays the type of test run.
●
The Times Failed is the number of times the device has failed a test.
●
The Defect Code provides a numerical code for the failure. The error codes are defined in the
Help tab.
●
The Description section describes the error that the diagnostic test found.
●
The Reason section describes the likely cause of the error.
●
The Recommended Repair will give a recommended action that should be performed to
resolve the failed hardware.
●
The Warranty ID is a unique error code associated with the specific error on your computer.
When contacting the HP Support Center for assistance with a hardware failure, please be
prepared to provide the Warranty ID.
The Clear Errors button will clear the contents of the Error Log.
The contents of the Error Log may be saved as a HTML file to USB flash drive by clicking the Save
button.
316
Appendix G Computer Diagnostic Features
Help Tab
The Help tab contains a Vision Help section, and a Test Components section. This tab includes
search and index features. You may also review the HP End User License Agreement (EULA), as well as
the HP Vision Diagnostic application version information on this tab.
The Vision Help section contains information on the major functions of Hewlett-Packard Vision
Diagnostics.
The Test Components section provides a description of each test, as well as the parameters that may
be adjusted when running in Custom test mode.
The Defect codes section contains information on the numerical error code that may appear in the
Errors tab.
The Memory test tab section provides information on the HP Memory Test application that may
be launched from the boot menu.
The HP Support section provides information on obtaining technical support from HP.
Saving and Printing Information in HP Vision Diagnostics
You can save the information displayed in the HP Vision Diagnostics Survey, History and Errors
tabs to a USB flash drive. You can not save to the hard drive. The system will automatically create an
html file that has the same appearance as the information displayed on the screen.
1.
Insert a USB flash drive if running HP Vision Diagnostics from CD.
2.
Click Save in the bottom on any of the Survey, History or Errors tabs. All three log files will
be saved regardless of from which tab the Save button was clicked.
3.
Select the drive onto which you will save the log files and click the Save button. Three html files
will be saved to the inserted USB flash drive.
NOTE: Do not remove the USB flash drive until you see a message indicating that the html files
have been written to the media.
4.
Print the desired information from the storage device used to save it.
NOTE: To exit HP Vision Diagnostics, click the Exit Diagnostics button at the bottom of the screen.
Be sure to remove the USB flash drive or CD from the optical drive.
Downloading the Latest Version of HP Vision Diagnostics
1.
Go to http://www.hp.com.
2.
Click the Software & Drivers link.
3.
Select Download drivers and software (and firmware).
4.
Enter your product name in the text box and press the Enter key.
5.
Select your specific computer model.
6.
Select your OS.
7.
Click the Diagnostic link.
Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics
317
8.
Click the Hewlett-Packard Vision Diagnostics link.
9.
Click the Download button.
NOTE: The download includes instructions on how to create the bootable CD or the bootable USB
flash drive.
Protecting the Software
To protect software from loss or damage, you should keep a backup copy of all system software,
applications, and related files stored on the hard drive. See the operating system or backup utility
documentation for instructions on making backup copies of data files.
318
Appendix G Computer Diagnostic Features
H
Backup and Recovery
Windows 7 – Backup and Recovery
To protect your information, use Windows® Backup and Restore to back up individual files and folders,
back up your entire hard drive (select models only), create system repair discs (select models only), or
create system restore points. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the
contents of your computer.
Windows Backup and Restore provides the following options:
●
Creating a system repair disc (select models only)
●
Backing up individual files and folders
●
Creating a system image (select models only)
●
Scheduling automatic backups (select models only)
●
Creating system restore points
●
Recovering individual files
●
Restoring the computer to a previous state
●
Recovering information using recovery tools
NOTE: For detailed instructions, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support.
NOTE: In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save
them for later use.
Backing up your information
Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. You should create system
repair discs (select models only) and your initial backup immediately after software setup. As you add
new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain
a reasonably current backup. The system repair discs (select models only) are used to start up (boot) the
computer and repair the operating system in case of system instability or failure. Your initial and
subsequent backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs.
You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs.
Windows 7 – Backup and Recovery
319
Note the following when backing up:
●
Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly.
●
Back up templates that are stored in their associated programs.
●
Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot
of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences.
To create a screen shot:
1.
Display the screen you want to save.
2.
Copy the screen image:
To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc.
To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc.
3.
Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste.
The screen image is added to the document.
4.
●
Save the document.
When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R,
CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVD±RW. The discs you use will depend on the
type of optical drive installed in your computer.
NOTE: DVDs and DVDs with double-layer (DL) support store more information than CDs, so
using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required.
●
When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the
computer.
To create a backup using Backup and Restore, follow these steps:
NOTE: Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process.
NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the
computer.
1.
Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image (select models
only), or create a system repair disc (select models only).
NOTE: Windows® includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your
computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing
software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more
information.
320
Appendix H Backup and Recovery
Performing a recovery
In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:
●
Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you
have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might
prevent Windows from starting correctly.
●
F11 recovery tools: You can use the F11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image.
The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory.
NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair discs
you previously created (select models only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to
reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, refer to the “Using a
Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately)” section in this guide.
Using the Windows recovery tools
To recover information you previously backed up, follow these steps:
1.
Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your system settings, your computer (select models
only), or your files.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer.
You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running
utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information.
To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps:
CAUTION: All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently
removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as
the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery.
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition.
To check for the Windows partition, select Start > Computer.
To check for the HP Recovery partition, select Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and
then click Disk Management.
NOTE: If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are not listed, you must recover
your operating system and programs using the System Recovery discs that you can obtain from HP
Support.
3.
If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are listed, restart the computer, and then
press F8 before the Windows operating system loads.
4.
Select Repair Your Computer. The following options display: Startup Repair, System Restore,
System Image Recovery, Windows Memory Diagnostics, Command Prompt, Recovery Manager.
5.
Select one of the first three listed tools to repair your computer.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Windows 7 – Backup and Recovery
321
NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a
search for these topics in Help and Support.
Using F11
CAUTION: Using F11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files
you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. The F11
recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the
factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled.
If Windows 7 is not responding, but the computer is working, follow these steps to perform a System
Recovery.
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: select Start, right-click
Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management.
NOTE: If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are not listed, you must recover
your operating system and programs using the System Recovery discs that you can obtain from HP
Support.
3.
Press the Power button to turn on the computer.
4.
As soon as you see the initial company logo screen appear, repeatedly press the F11 key on your
keyboard until the Windows is Loading Files… message appears on the screen.
5.
Under I need help immediately, tap System Recovery.
6.
If you are prompted to back up your files, and you have not done so, tap Back up your files
first (recommended), and then tap Next. Otherwise, tap Recover without backing up
your files, and then tap Next.
7.
System Recovery begins. After System Recovery is complete, tap Finish to restart the computer.
Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately)
If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair discs you
previously created (select models only), you must use System Recovery discs that you can obtain from
HP Support to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. Make sure that your most recent
backup (stored on discs or on an external drive) is easily accessible.
CAUTION: All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently
removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system,
as well as drivers, software, and utilities.
To initiate recovery using a Windows 7 operating system DVD, follow these steps:
NOTE: This process takes several minutes.
322
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows 7 operating system DVD into the optical drive
before the Windows operating system loads.
3.
When prompted, press any keyboard key.
Appendix H Backup and Recovery
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Select Repair your computer.
7.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Windows Vista – Backup and Recovery
To protect your information, use the Backup and Restore Center to back up individual files and folders,
back up your entire hard drive (select models only), or create system restore points. In case of system
failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer.
The Backup and Restore Center provides the following options:
●
Backing up individual files and folders
●
Backing up the entire hard drive (select models only)
●
Scheduling automatic backups (select models only)
●
Creating system restore points
●
Recovering individual files
●
Restoring the computer to a previous state
●
Recovering information using recovery tools
NOTE: For detailed instructions, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support.
NOTE: In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save
them for later use.
Backing up your information
Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. You should create your
initial backup immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should
continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup.
You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs.
Note the following when backing up:
●
Store personal files in the Documents folder, and back it up regularly.
●
Back up templates that are stored in their associated programs.
●
Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot
of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences.
Windows Vista – Backup and Recovery
323
To create a screen shot:
1.
Display the screen you want to save.
2.
Copy the screen image:
To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc.
To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc.
3.
Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste.
The screen image is added to the document.
4.
●
Save the document.
When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R,
CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVD±RW. The discs you use will depend on the
type of optical drive installed in your computer.
NOTE: DVDs and DVDs with double-layer (DL) support store more information than CDs, so
using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required.
●
When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the
computer.
To create a backup using Backup and Restore Center, follow these steps:
NOTE: Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process.
NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the
computer.
1.
Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore Center.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to back up your entire computer (select models only) or your files.
NOTE: Windows® includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your
computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing
software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more
information.
Performing a recovery
In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:
●
Windows recovery tools: You can use the Backup and Restore Center to recover information you
have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might
prevent Windows from starting correctly.
●
F11 recovery tools: You can use the F11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image.
The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory.
NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer, you must use System Recovery discs that
you can obtain from HP Support to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional
information, refer to the “Using a Windows Vista operating system DVD (purchased separately)”
section in this guide.
324
Appendix H Backup and Recovery
Using the Windows recovery tools
To recover information you previously backed up, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore Center.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your entire computer (select models only) or your files.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer.
You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running
utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information.
To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps:
CAUTION: All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently
removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as
the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery.
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition. To find
the partitions, select Start > Computer.
NOTE: If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition have been deleted, you must
recover your operating system and programs using System Recovery discs that you can obtain
from HP Support. For additional information, refer to the “Using a Windows Vista operating
system DVD (purchased separately)” section in this guide.
3.
Restart the computer, and then press F8 before the Windows operating system loads.
4.
Select Repair Your Computer. The following options display: Startup Repair, System Restore,
System Image Recovery, Windows Memory Diagnostics, Command Prompt, Recovery Manager.
5.
Select one of the first three listed tools to repair your computer.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a
search for these topics in Help and Support.
Using F11
CAUTION: Using F11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files
you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. The F11
recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the
factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled.
To recover the original hard drive image using F11, follow these steps:
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition. To find the partition, select Start
> Computer.
NOTE: If the HP Recovery partition has been deleted, you must recover your operating system
and programs using System Recovery discs that you can obtain from HP Support. For additional
information, refer to the “Using a Windows Vista operating system DVD (purchased separately)”
section in this guide.
Windows Vista – Backup and Recovery
325
3.
Press the Power button to turn on the computer.
4.
As soon as you see the initial company logo screen appear, repeatedly press the F11 key on your
keyboard until the Windows is Loading Files… message appears on the screen.
5.
Under I need help immediately, tap System Recovery.
6.
If you are prompted to back up your files, and you have not done so, tap Back up your files
first (recommended), and then tap Next. Otherwise, tap Recover without backing up
your files, and then tap Next.
7.
System Recovery begins. After System Recovery is complete, tap Finish to restart the computer.
Using a Windows Vista operating system DVD (purchased separately)
If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer, you must use System Recovery discs that you can
obtain from HP Support to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. Make sure that your
most recent backup (stored on discs or on an external drive) is easily accessible.
CAUTION: All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently
removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system,
as well as drivers, software, and utilities.
To initiate recovery using a Windows Vista operating system DVD, follow these steps:
NOTE: This process takes several minutes.
326
1.
If possible, back up all personal files.
2.
Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows Vista operating system DVD into the optical
drive before the Windows operating system loads.
3.
When prompted, press any keyboard key.
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Select Repair your computer.
7.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Appendix H Backup and Recovery
I
Specifications
CMT Specifications
Table I-1 Specifications
Chassis
Height
17.6 in
44.8 cm
Width
7.0 in
17.8 cm
Depth
18.0 in
44.5 cm
Approximate Weight
24.5 lb
11.2 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop
position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no
direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and
number of options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
CMT Specifications
327
Table I-1 Specifications (continued)
1
Standard Efficiency
320W
High Efficiency
320W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
Rated Input Current
5.5A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark requirements
for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the added benefit of
not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
MT Specifications
Table I-2 Specifications
Chassis
Height
14.9 in
37.7 cm
Width
7.0 in
17.7 cm
Depth
17.0 in
43.1 cm
Approximate Weight
20.5 lb
9.3 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop
position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no
direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and
number of options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
328
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Appendix I Specifications
Table I-2 Specifications (continued)
1
Standard Efficiency
320W
High Efficiency
320W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
Rated Input Current
5.5A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark requirements
for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the added benefit of
not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
MT Specifications
329
SFF Specifications
Table I-3 Specifications
Chassis (in the desktop position)
Height
4.0 in
10.0 cm
Width
13.3 in
33.8 cm
Depth
14.9 in
37.9 cm
Approximate Weight
16.7 lb
7.6 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop position)
77 lb
35 kg
Operating
50° to 95°F
10° to 35°C
Nonoperating
-22° to 140°F
-30° to 60°C
Temperature Range
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level; no direct
sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of options
installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7°C max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
1
330
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Standard Efficiency
240W active PFC
High Efficiency
240W active PFC; 87/90/87% efficient at
20/50/100% load
Rated Input Current
4A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark requirements
for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the added benefit of
not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
Appendix I Specifications
USDT Specifications
Table I-4 Specifications
Chassis
Height
2.60 in
6.6 cm
Width
9.90 in
25.1 cm
Depth
10.00 in
25.4 cm
Approximate Weight
6.8 lb
3.1 kg
Weight Supported (maximum distributed load in desktop position)
77 lb
35 kg
50° to 95° F
10° to 35° C
-22° to 140° F
-30° to 60° C
(depth will increase if the computer is equipped with a port security bracket)
Temperature Range (values subject to change with increasing altitude above
sea level)
Operating
Nonoperating
NOTE: Operating temperature is derated 1.0° C per 300 m (1,000 ft) to 3,000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level, no direct
sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10° C (50° F)/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of
options installed.
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Operating (28° C (82.4° F) max wet bulb)
10-90%
10-90%
Nonoperating (38.7° C (101.66° F) max wet bulb)
5-95%
5-95%
Operating
10,000 ft
3,048 m
Nonoperating
30,000 ft
9,144 m
Maximum Altitude (unpressurized)
Power Supply
1
Operating Voltage Range
90-264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range1
100-240 VAC
Rated Line Frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency
47-63 Hz
Rated Input Current
N/A
This system utilizes an active power factor corrected external power supply. This allows the system to pass the CE mark
requirements for use in the countries of the European Union. The active power factor corrected power supply also has the
added benefit of not requiring an input voltage range select switch.
USDT Specifications
331
Index
A
AC adapter, USDT
spare part number 40, 47
access panel
CMT removal and
replacement 77
CMT spare part number 77
MT removal 129
MT spare part number 129
SFF removal and replacement
170
SFF spare part number 170
USDT removal and
replacement 211
USDT spare part number 211
access panel, CMT
spare part number 18
access panel, locked 267
access panel, MT
spare part number 28, 29, 39
access panel, SFF
spare part number 50, 60
access panel, USDT
spare part number 40, 49
adapter, DisplayPort to DVI
spare part number 23, 34,
44, 55
adapter, DisplayPort to DVI (not
illustrated)
spare part number 20, 31,
41, 52
adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI
spare part number 26, 37,
47, 58
adapter, DisplayPort to HDMI (not
illustrated)
spare part number 20, 31,
41, 52
332
Index
adapter, DisplayPort to VGA
spare part number 25, 36,
47, 57
adapter, DisplayPort to VGA (not
illustrated)
spare part number 20, 31,
41, 52
antenna, spare part number 21
audible codes 259
audio problems 284
B
backing up files 319, 323
Backup and Restore 319, 320
Backup and Restore Center 323,
324
battery
disposal 68
battery replacement 245
beep codes 259
bezel blank
spare part number 131
bezel blank, 3.5-inch
spare part number 32, 36
bezel blank, 5.25-inch
spare part number 32, 36
bezel blank, USDT
spare part number 46
boot problems 300
booting options
Full Boot 250
Quick Boot 250
C
cable management 69
cable pinouts
SATA data 69
card reader
spare part number 31, 38,
53, 59
USDT removal and
replacement 228
USDT spare part number 228
card reader, USDT
spare part number 42, 46
cautions
AC power 61
cables 67
cooling fan 67
electrostatic discharge 62
keyboard cleaning 66
keyboard keys 66
CD-ROM or DVD problems 298
chasis types, illustrated 61
chassis fan, CMT
spare part number 20, 28
clamp lock, spare part number
21, 23, 32, 34, 43, 44, 53, 55
cleaning
computer 65
mouse 66
safety precautions 65
CMOS
backing up 307
clearing and resetting 309
CMT
access panel removal and
replacement 77
access panel, spare part
number 18
chassis fan, spare part
number 20, 28
disassembly preparation 76
fan shroud removal and
replacement 109
fan, spare part number 20, 28
front bezel removal and
replacement 78
front bezel, spare part
number 18
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 20
front I/O device removal and
replacement 110
heat sink removal and
replacement 115
heat sink, spare part number
20, 28
power supply removal and
replacement 120
power supply, spare part
number 18
power switch removal and
replacement 112
power switch/LED assembly,
spare part number 19
preparation for disassembly
76
processor removal and
replacement 117
rear chassis fan removal and
replacement 114
SATA hard drive cable, spare
part number 20
SATA optical drive cable, spare
part number 19
speaker removal and
replacement 113
speaker, spare part number
20, 28
system board removal and
replacement 121
system board, spare part
number 19
computer
changing from desktop to
tower 242
specifications 330, 331
computer cleaning 65
connecting drive cables 90
country power cord set
requirements 249
creating a backup 319, 323
Customer Support 263, 306
D
desktop conversion
CMT 123
diagnostics utility 313
DIMMs. See memory
disassembly preparation
CMT 76
MT 128
SFF 169
USDT 210
diskette problems 272
DisplayPort cable
spare part number 23, 34,
44, 55
DisplayPort cable (not illustrated)
spare part number 20, 31,
41, 52
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable
spare part number 23, 34, 55
DMS-59 to dual VGA cable (not
illustrated)
spare part number 20, 31, 52
Drive Protection System (DPS) 311
drives
CMT cable connections 95
CMT installation 95
CMT locations 91
connecting cables 90
installing 90
MT cable connections 143
MT installation 143
MT locations 142
SFF cable connections 184
SFF installation 184
SFF locations 183
E
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
preventing damage 62
error
codes 250, 259
messages 251
eSATA port (expansion), spare part
number 22, 28, 33, 39, 54,
60, 176
expansion card
CMT installation 86
CMT removal 86
MT installation 138
MT removal 138
SFF installation 176
SFF removal 176
expansion slot cover
CMT removal 87
MT removal 139
SFF removal 177
F
F11 recovery 322, 325
fan
CMT spare part number 114
MT spare part number 163
fan (front), USDT
spare part number 43, 49
fan (rear), USDT
spare part number 42
fan duct
SFF removal and replacement
193
SFF spare part number 193
spare part number 39, 60
fan duct, MT
spare part number 31
fan duct, SFF
spare part number 52
fan sink
CMT removal and
replacement 115
CMT spare part number 115
fan with guard, MT
spare part number 31, 36
fan with guard, USDT
spare part number 47
fan, CMT
spare part number 20, 28
fan, MT
spare part number 31, 38
fan, power supply 67
fan, SFF
spare part number 52, 59
fan/baffle assembly
MT removal and replacement
153
FireWire card, spare part
number 22, 27, 33, 39, 54,
59, 176
flash drive problems 300
flashing LEDs 259
Index
333
front bezel
CMT removal and
replacement 78
CMT security 79
CMT spare part number 78
MT blank removal 131
MT removal 130
MT spare part number 130
removing blanks 80, 172,
213
SFF removal and replacement
171
SFF spare part number 171
USDT removal and
replacement 212
USDT spare part number 212
front bezel, CMT
spare part number 18
front bezel, MT
spare part number 28, 29, 39
front bezel, SFF
spare part number 50, 60
front bezel, USDT
spare part number 40, 49
front fan
SFF removal and replacement
194
SFF spare part number 194
USDT removal and
replacement 219
USDT spare part number 219
front fan assembly
MT spare part number 153
front I/O and power switch
assembly
SFF spare part number 197
front I/O and USB assembly
CMT spare part number 110
front I/O assembly
MT spare part number 155
front I/O assembly, CMT
spare part number 20
front I/O assembly, MT
spare part number 28, 30, 39
front I/O assembly, SFF
spare part number 51, 60
front I/O device
CMT removal and
replacement 110
334
Index
front I/O panel, USDT
spare part number 42, 46
front I/O, power switch assembly
SFF removal and replacement
197
front panel problems 302
front USB panel
MT removal and replacement
155
G
general problems 266
graphics card, spare part
number 22, 28, 33, 39, 54,
60, 176
grounding methods 63
guide screws
CMT location 96
MT location 144
SFF location 184
H
hard drive
CMT installation 99
CMT removal 92
installing 103
MT installation 149
MT removal 149
proper handling 68
SATA characteristics 69
SFF installation 190
SFF removal 190
spare part number 27, 38,
49, 59
spare part numbers 21, 27,
28, 32, 38, 39, 40, 43, 53,
59, 60
USDT installation 223
USDT removal 223
hard drive conversion bracket,
spare part number 20, 22, 32,
34
hard drive problems 275
hard drive recovery 322, 325
hard drive, USDT
spare part number 223
hardware installation problems
290
heat sink
MT removal and replacement
157
MT spare part number 157
SFF removal and replacement
200
SFF spare part number 200
USDT removal and
replacement 231
USDT spare part number 231
heat sink, CMT
spare part number 20, 28
heat sink, MT
spare part number 31, 39
heat sink, SFF
spare part number 52, 60
heat sink, USDT
spare part number 42, 46
helpful hints 264
hood sensor
CMT removal and
replacement 109
SFF removal and replacement
196
SFF spare part number 196
spare part number 20, 28,
31, 39, 43, 49, 53, 60, 109
USDT removal and
replacement 237
USDT spare part number 237
I
installing
battery 245
CMT drive cables 95
CMT expansion card 86
CMT hard drive 99
CMT media card reader 97
CMT memory 82
CMT optical drive 97
drive cables 90
guide screws 90
hard drive 103
MT drive cables 143
MT expansion card 138
MT hard drive 149
MT media card reader 147
MT memory 134
MT optical drive 147
removable hard drive 104
SFF drive cables 184
SFF expansion card 176
SFF hard drive 190
SFF media card reader 188
SFF memory 172
SFF optical drive 186
USDT hard drive 223
USDT memory 215
USDT optical drive 222
Internet access problems 302
K
keyboard
cleaning 66
spare part numbers 21, 23,
24, 25, 26, 32, 34, 35, 36,
37, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48,
53, 55, 56, 57, 58
keyboard problems 288
L
LEDs
blinking power 259
blinking PS/2 keyboard 259
locks
CMT front bezel 79
M
media card reader
CMT installation 97
CMT removal 92
MT installation 147
MT removal 145
SFF installation 188
SFF removal 187
Media Card Reader problems
278
memory
CMT installation 82
CMT socket population 83
CMT specifications 82
MT installation 134
MT socket population 135
MT specifications 134
SFF installation 172
SFF socket population 173
SFF specifications 173
USDT installation 215
USDT socket population 216
USDT specifications 215
memory module
spare part number 82, 134,
172
memory module, USDT
spare part number 215
memory modules
spare part number 19, 25,
27, 29, 36, 38, 41, 50, 57,
59
memory modules, USDT
spare part number 49
memory problems 296
monitor problems 280
mouse
cleaning 66
spare part numbers 21, 32,
43, 53
mouse problems 288
MT
access panel, spare part
number 28, 29, 39
disassembly preparation 128
fan duct, spare part number
31
fan with guard, spare part
number 31, 36
fan, spare part number 31, 38
fan/baffle assembly removal
and replacement 153
front bezel, spare part
number 28, 29, 39
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 28, 30, 39
front USB panel removal and
replacement 155
heat sink removal and
replacement 157
heat sink, spare part number
31, 39
optical drive cable/connector,
spare part number 47
power supply removal and
replacement 165
power supply, spare part
number 18, 26, 29, 37
power switch/LED assembly
removal and replacement
156
power switch/LED assembly,
spare part number 28, 31,
39
preparation for disassembly
128
processor removal and
replacement 159
rear chassis fan removal and
replacement 163
SATA cable, spare part
number 28, 31, 39
SATA hard drive cable, spare
part number 28, 30, 39
SATA optical drive cable, spare
part number 28, 30, 40
speaker removal and
replacement 162
speaker, spare part number
20, 28, 31, 39
system board removal and
replacement 167
system board, spare part
number 25, 28, 29, 36, 37,
40
N
network problems 292
NIC, spare part number 22, 27,
38, 59, 176
numeric error codes 251
O
operating guidelines 64
optical drive
CMT installation 97
CMT removal 92
MT installation 147
MT removal 145
SFF installation 186
SFF removal 185
spare part numbers 21, 25,
26, 33, 36, 37, 44, 47, 49,
54, 57, 58
USDT installation 222
USDT release latch attachment
221
USDT removal 220
optical drive cable/connector,
USDT
spare part number 41, 47
Index
335
optical drive problems 298
optical drive rail
USDT removal and
replacement 227
optical drive rail and cable kit,
USDT
spare part number 46
optical drive rail kit
USDT spare part number 227
optical drive rail, USDT
spare part number 43
optical drive, USDT
spare part number 220
overheating, prevention 64
P
password
clearing 307
power-on 307
setup 307
port cover
USDT spare part number 243
POST error messages 250
power cord set requirements
country specific 249
power problems 270
power supply
CMT removal and
replacement 120
CMT spare part number 120
fan 67
MT removal and replacement
165
MT spare part number 165
operating voltage range 327,
328, 330, 331
SFF removal and replacement
205
power supply, MT
spare part number 26, 29, 37
power supply, MT, CMT
spare part number 18
power supply, SFF
spare part number 50, 58
power switch
CMT removal and
replacement 112
power switch/LED assembly
CMT spare part number 112
336
Index
MT removal and replacement
156
MT spare part number 156
power switch/LED assembly, CMT
spare part number 19
power switch/LED assembly, MT
spare part number 28, 31, 39
power-on password 307
printer port (expansion), spare part
number 22, 28, 33, 39, 54,
60, 176
printer problems 286
problems
audio 284
CD-ROM or DVD 298
diskette 272
flash drive 300
front panel 302
general 266
hard drive 275
hardware installation 290
Internet access 302
keyboard 288
Media Card Reader 278
memory 296
monitor 280
mouse 288
network 292
power 270
printer 286
processor 297
software 305
processor
CMT removal and
replacement 117
MT removal and replacement
159
SFF removal and replacement
202
spare part number 19, 28,
30, 39, 41, 49, 51, 60
USDT removal and
replacement 233
processor problems 297
product ID locations 73
R
rear chassis fan
CMT removal and
replacement 114
CMT spare part number 114
MT removal and replacement
163
MT spare part number 163
rear fan
USDT removal and
replacement 240
USDT spare part number 240
rear port cover, USDT
spare part number 43, 49
recovering information 321, 324
recovery partition 322, 325
removable hard drive
replacing 104
removal and replacement
CMT access panel 77
CMT fan sink 115
CMT front bezel 78
CMT front I/O device 110
CMT hood sensor 109
CMT power supply 120
CMT power switch 112
CMT processor 117
CMT rear chassis fan 114
CMT speaker 113
CMT system board 121
MT fan/baffle assembly 153
MT front USB panel 155
MT heat sink 157
MT power supply 165
MT power switch/LED
assembly 156
MT processor 159
MT rear chassis fan 163
MT speaker 162
MT system board 167
SFF fan duct 193
SFF front bezel 170, 171
SFF front fan 194
SFF front I/O, power switch
assembly 197
SFF heat sink 200
SFF hood sensor 196
SFF power supply 205
SFF processor 202
SFF speaker 199
SFF system board 207
USDT access panel 211
USDT card reader 228
USDT front bezel 212
USDT front fan 219
USDT heat sink 231
USDT hood sensor 237
USDT optical drive rail 227
USDT processor 233
USDT rear fan 240
USDT speaker 230
USDT system board 238
USDT TV tuner module 236
USDT WLAN tuner module
236
removing
battery 245
bezel blanks 172, 213
CMT bezel blanks 80
CMT drives 92
CMT expansion card 86
CMT expansion slot cover 87
CMT media card reader 92
MT bezel blanks 131
MT computer access panel
129
MT expansion card 138
MT expansion slot cover 139
MT front bezel 130
MT hard drive 149
MT media card reader 145
MT optical drive 145
SFF expansion card 176
SFF expansion slot cover 177
SFF hard drive 190
SFF media card reader 187
SFF optical drive 185
USDT hard drive 223
USDT optical drive 220
resetting
CMOS 307
password jumper 307
restoring the hard drive 322, 325
S
safety and comfort 263
safety precautions
cleaning 65
SATA
connectors on system board
69
data cable pinouts 69
hard drive characteristics 69
SATA cable
spare part number 20
SATA cable, MT
spare part number 28, 31, 39
SATA cable, SFF
spare part number 51, 60
SATA drive cable, SFF
spare part number 51, 60
SATA hard drive cable, CMT
spare part number 20
SATA hard drive cable, MT
spare part number 28, 30, 39
SATA optical drive cable, CMT
spare part number 19
SATA optical drive cable, MT
spare part number 28, 30, 40
screws, correct size 67
security
CMT front bezel 79
serial number locations 73
serial port (expansion), spare part
number 22, 28, 33, 39, 54,
60, 176
service considerations 66
setup password 307
SFF
access panel, spare part
number 50, 60
disassembly preparation 169
fan duct removal and
replacement 193
fan duct, spare part number
52
fan, spare part number 52, 59
front bezel removal and
replacement 170, 171
front bezel, spare part
number 50, 60
front fan removal and
replacement 194
front I/O assembly, spare part
number 51, 60
front I/O, power switch
assembly removal and
replacement 197
heat sink removal and
replacement 200
heat sink, spare part number
52, 60
hood sensor removal and
replacement 196
power supply removal and
replacement 205
power supply, spare part
number 50, 58
preparation for disassembly
169
processor removal and
replacement 202
SATA cable, spare part
number 51, 60
SATA drive cable, spare part
number 51, 60
speaker removal and
replacement 199
speaker, spare part number
52, 60
system board removal and
replacement 207
system board, spare part
number 47, 50, 57, 58, 60
software
backing up 318
problems 305
servicing computer 67
solenoid lock
spare part number 20, 28,
31, 39, 53, 60
solid-state drive, spare part
number 21, 25, 28, 33, 36,
39, 43, 47, 49, 54, 57, 60
spare part number
tamper-resistant wrench 67
Torx T-15 screwdriver 67
speaker
CMT removal and
replacement 113
CMT spare part number 113
MT removal and replacement
162
MT spare part number 162
SFF removal and replacement
199
SFF spare part number 199
USDT removal and
replacement 230
USDT spare part number 230
speaker, CMT, MT
spare part number 20, 28
Index
337
speaker, MT
spare part number 31, 39
speaker, SFF
spare part number 52, 60
speaker, USDT
spare part number 42, 49
specifications
CMT memory 82
computer 327, 330, 331
MT memory 134
SFF memory 173
USDT memory 215
stand, USDT
spare part number 47
static electricity 62
system board
CMT removal and
replacement 121
CMT spare part number 121
MT removal and replacement
167
MT spare part number 167,
207
SATA connectors 69
SFF removal and replacement
207
SFF spare part number 207
USDT removal and
replacement 238
USDT spare part number 238
system board connections
MT 132
SFF 180
USDT 214
system board, CMT
spare part number 19
system board, MT
spare part number 25, 28,
29, 36, 37, 40
system board, SFF
spare part number 47, 50,
57, 58, 60
system board, USDT
spare part number 40, 49
T
tamper-proof screws
tool 67
temperature control 64
tools, servicing 67
338
Index
Torx T15 screwdriver 67
tower configuration 242
tower conversion
CMT 125
tower orientation 209
TV tuner module
USDT removal and
replacement 236
TV tuner, spare part number
47
44,
U
USB 3.0 port (expansion), spare
part number 22, 26, 33, 37,
54, 58, 176
USB powered speakers, spare part
number 20, 25, 32, 36, 43,
46, 53, 57
USDT
AC adapter, spare part
number 40, 47
access panel removal and
replacement 211
access panel, spare part
number 40, 49
card reader removal and
replacement 228
card reader, spare part
number 42, 46
disassembly preparation 210
fan (front), spare part number
43, 49
fan (rear), spare part number
42
fan with guard, spare part
number 47
front bezel removal and
replacement 212
front bezel, spare part
number 40, 49
front fan removal and
replacement 219
front I/O panel, spare part
number 42, 46
heat sink removal and
replacement 231
heat sink, spare part number
42, 46
hood sensor removal and
replacement 237
optical drive cable/connector,
spare part number 41
optical drive rail and cable kit,
spare part number 46
optical drive rail removal and
replacement 227
optical drive rail, spare part
number 43
preparation for disassembly
210
processor removal and
replacement 233
rear fan removal and
replacement 240
rear port cover, spare part
number 43, 49
speaker removal and
replacement 230
speaker, spare part number
42, 49
stand, spare part number 47
system board removal and
replacement 238
system board, spare part
number 40, 49
TV tuner module removal and
replacement 236
WLAN module removal and
replacement 236
V
ventilation, proper 64
Vision Diagnostics 313
W
Wake-on-LAN feature 292
Windows 7 operating system
DVD 322
Windows Vista operating system
DVD 326
WLAN module
USDT removal and
replacement 236
USDT spare part number 236